FAPT Ladder for PC-Operator Manual

7/25/2019 FAPT Ladder for PC-Operator Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/fapt-ladder-for-pc-operator-manual 1/302

Computer Numerical Control Products

GE Fanuc Automation

FAPT Ladder for PC

Operators Manual

B-66131EN/05 Japan 1995



Warnings and notices for

this publication

GFLE-003

Warning

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the variousmatters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.

Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in thismanual should be regarded as “impossible”.

NoticeThis document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have

been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or

variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with

installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in

all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to

holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with

respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of

the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall

apply.

The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

CIMPLICITY® Genius®

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Alarm Master

CIMSTAR

Field Control

Genet

Helpmate

LogicMaster Modelmaster

PowerMotion

ProLoop

PROMACRO

Series Five

Series 90

Series One

Series Six

Series ThreeVuMaster

Workmaster

© Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.



CONTENTS

I. BASICS (NORMAL OPERATIONS)

1. OVERVIEW

......................................................

l-1

2. INSTALLATION

...................................................

1-5

2.1 Operating Environment

..........................................

1 - 6

2.1.1

PC9801 operating environment

...............

._

.............

1 - 7

2.1.2 IBM PC/AT operating environment

...........................

l-10

2.2 Installation Procedure

.......................................... l-11

3. ACTIVATION

....................................................

l-15

4. BASICOPERATION

.......................

..q

.....................

l-17

4.1 Menu Configuration

...........................................

l-17

4.2 Common System Operations

.....................................

l-19

4.3 Model Setting

................................................ l-21

5. OPERATION

....................................................

5.1 Editing

.....................................................

5.1 .l Title data editing

........................................

5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing

...................................

5.1.3 Symbol and comment editing

...............................

5.1.4 Message editing

........................................

5.1.5 I’0 module editing

.......................................

5.1.6 System parameter editing

.................................

5.2 Printout

....................................................

5.3 Compilation

.................................................

5.3.1 Operation

.............................................

5.3.2 Password set function

(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4’RB5/RB6/RC3 RC4/NB NB2) .............

5.3.3 Changing the Order of Subprograms

.........................

5.3.4 It is possible to choose output data

(Symbol/Comment. Net comment) to ROM format file

.............

5.3.5 The list of source program

................................

5.3.6 DOS command

........................................

5.4 Decompilation

..............................................

5.4.1 Operation

............................................

5.4.2 Outputting to split files

...................................

5.4.3 Converting a step sequence program according to the model

.......

5.4.4 Merge ..............................................

5.5 Link

......................................................

l-22

l-22

l-25

l-26

l-60

l-68

l-70

l-73

l-85

1 - 94

l-95

l-99

1 -

103

l-103

l-105

l-109

l-110

l-110

l-112

1-113

1-113

l-116



5. 6 I nputi Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. 6. 1

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.2

Transfer to and from PMC-L/M (FANUC Series 0)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.3

Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A’B.‘C. E) . .

5.6.4 Transfer to and from PMC-N NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A,

-MODELB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56.5

input/Output for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate)

. . . . .

5.6.6

Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB QC

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.6.7

Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card

. . .

5.6.8

Handy File + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. 6. 9

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER + 3.5” floppy disk (P-G format)

. . . . .

5.7 Mnemonic Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.1

Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.2

Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.3 Mnemonic file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.4

Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

. . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.5

Sample mnemonic files (all-format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.7.6

The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model

5.7.7

User batch file execution

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

II. APPLICATIONS (NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC’AT

..................

2- l

1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC ..................

2- l

1 l l

Command input during startup

...............................

2- l

1.1.2

Communications settings

...................................

2- 2

1. 1. 3

Protocol ...............................................

2- 4

1.1.4

BUSY control ...........................................

2- 4

1.1.5

Data start and end codes

...................................

2- 5

1. 1. 6

Data conversion (return codes)

...............................

2- 5

1.1.7

Transmission and receive data

...............................

2- 5

1.1.8

Error detection and messages

...............................

2- 6

1. 1. 9

Error detection and handling

.................................

2- 7

1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program ..........................

2- 8

1.2.1

Converting by system parameter editing

........................

2- 8

1.2.2

Convert with signal address converter

..........................

2- 9

1. 2. 3

Using data in a sequence program for another program

............

2-11

1.3 Standard Symbol Data

.........................................

2-11

1.4 Changing Printer Output Format

...................................

2-12

1.4.1

Changing the paper selection name

..........................

2-14

1.4.2

Setting the top margin

....................................

2-14

1.4.3

Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

...................

2-14

1. 4. 4

Setting the printer model and print paper

.......................

2-15

1.4.5 Setting the line spacing ...................................

2-16

1.4.6

Sett i ng

he left margin

....................................

2-16

l - 119

1-122

1-124

1-128

l- 131

1-134

l - 140

1-142

1-147

1-149

l - 150

l - 150

l - 152

1-153

1-157

1-166

l - 170

1-171



1.4.7 Setting the title of printout

.................................

2-19

1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

.... 2 - 19

1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information

................ 2 - 20

1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference list output format

................. 2 - 20

1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list readiwrite coil guidance information ....

2-21

1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

.....................

2-21

1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break

................... 2 - 21

1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance

........................... 2 - 22

1.4.15 Setting the output information

...............................

2-22

1.4.16 Setting the output format

..................................

2-22

1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance

........................... 2 - 23

1.4.18 Setting line feed

........................................

2-23

1.4.19 Setting form feed

.......................................

2-23

III.THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1. OVERVIEW

......................................................

3-l

1.1 WhatisaStepSequence?

.......................................

3-l

1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method

......................... 3 - 1

1.3 A Program Configuration Screen

...................................

3 - 1

1.4 The Configration of a Sequence Program

............................. 3 - 2

1.5 DataFlow

...................................................

3-3

2. SETTING A MODEL ................................................ 3-4

2.1 Operation

....................................................

3-4

3. EDITING

........................................................ 3-6

3.1 Basic Operation

...............................................

3 - 6

3.2 Creating a Step Sequence

.......................................

3 - 9

3.2.1

Creating a subprogram of the step sequence

.....................

3 - 9

3.2.2

Creating a step sequence program

...........................

3 - 10



APPENDIX

APPENDIX 1 DATA TRANSFER CABLES

..................................

Al - 1

APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

............

A2 - 1

APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

......................................

A3 - 1

APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

............

A4 - 1

APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20)

.........

A5 - 1

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl RA3, NB, AND QC) A6 - 1

APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

.............................

A7- 1

APPENDIX 8 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

...............

A8 - 1

APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE

................................

A9 - 1

APPENDIX lOMANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

..........................

AlO- 1

APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%?‘oFLSET.CNF.‘.

.............

Al 1 - 1

APPENDIX 12 INQUIRY FORM

.........................................

A12- 1



I. BASICS

(NORMAL OPERATIONS)



1. OVERVIEW

1. OVERVIEW

This manual describes the software products listed below which are included in the FAPT LADDER

offline programming system for FANUC PMC sequence program generation. These software

products are designed to run on standard personal computers.

Personal

computer

Name Specification Remarks

JEC PC9801 FAPT LADDER PMC-L/M/P

A08B-9200-J500#JP For the NEC PC9801

FAPT LADDER PMC-N

A08B-9200-J501 #JP

Series and compatible

FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/‘RC A08B-9200-J502#JP machines (Japanese

language version)

BM PC/AT

FAPT LADDER PMC-UM/P A08B-9201 -JSOO#EN For IBM PC/AT and

FAPT LADDER PMC-N

A08B-9201-J501#EN compatible machines

FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC A08B-9201-J502#EN (English language version)

This manual explains procedures required to install, activate, and operate the software above that

are specific to the system designed for use with personal computers. For PMC operations and

how to create PMC sequence programs, refer to the manuals listed below.

FANUC PMC-MODEL K/UM P

Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-551 93E

FANUC PMC-MODEL N

Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-61013E

FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1 :PA3:RAl ‘RA2 RA3/RB’RB2 RB3iRB4 RBS’RBG;RC RC3’RC4 NB’NB2

Programming Manual (LADDER language) B-61 863E

Inquiry form

If you have any questions after reading this operator’s manual and the manuals listed above,

use the inquiry form attached at Appendix 12 to consult us the questions.

l-l



1. OVERVIEW

The following abbreviations are used in this manual for PMC models.

Abbreviations

PMC-UM P

* PMC-L

* PMC-M

* PMC-P

Pfk-N

PMC-R Series

* PMC-RAl _ *

* PMC-RA2 .-

* PMC-RA3

- PMC-RB

- PMCRB2

* PMC-RB3

- PMC-RB4

- PMC-RB5

* PMC-RB6

. PMC-RC

* PMGRC3

* PMCRC4

PMC-PA1

PMC-PA3

PMC-QA

PMC-QC

PMC-NA

PMC-NB

PMC-NB2

PMC Models

FANUC PMC-MODEL L

FANUC PMC-MODEL M

FANUC PMC-MODEL P

FANUC PMC-MODEL N

FANUC PMC-MODEL RAl

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA2

FANUC PMC-MODEL RA3

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB2

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB3

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB5

FANUC PMC-MODEL RB6

FANUC PMC-MODEL RC

FANUC PMC-MODEL RC3

FANUC PM&MODEL RC4

FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1

FANUC PMC-MODEL PA3

FANUC PMC-MODEL QA

FANUC PMC-MODEL QC

FANUC PMC-MODEL NA

FANUC PMC-MODEL NB

FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2

1-2



1. OVERVIEW

The major functions of the software are listed below.

(1)

Sequence program input. display, and editing

(2)

Transmission to and from PMC (RAM), and PMC verification

(3)

ROM (EPROM, ROM cassette, and ROM modules) write, read, and verification

(4)

Sequence program print-out

Memory

card

. . . . .

c=e

,................................ > (-NC

RS232C

PMC

RS232C 3

FLOPPY

CASSETTE

/Handy File

Machine Tool

DVDO

‘

Personal computer

Floppy disk

NEC PC9801

IBM PC/AT

Input/Edit

sequence

program

Memory card

interface

Drawing

1-3



1. OVERVIEW

Operation flow for FAPT LADDER activation

Prepare personal computer. MS-DOS, and FAPT LADDER

+

Install MS-DOS

4

Create directory for FAPT LADDER

1

Install FAPT LADDER

+

Install device drivers

@et CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT)

J.

Reset personal computer

Activate FAPT LADDER

Set model (PMC)

Operations includinq editing

J/

End?

JI

Yes

Reference chapter/section

Section 2.2

- Section 2.1

- Section 5.6

- Chapter 3

- Section 4.3

- Chapter 5

Terminate FAPT LADDER

l-4



2. INSTALLATION

2. INSTALLATION

FAPT LADDER software is stored on the floppy disks

listed below. Before the system can be

used, the contents of these system floppy disks must be

written to a hard disk;

the software cannot

be run directly from the floppy disks. To install the system on a hard disk, the user needs to be

familiar with the hardware and software of his or her personal computer, particularly with basic MS-

DOS command operation and files such as CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT.

The names of the floppy disks are listed below.

FAPT LADDER PMC-L;M:P system floppy disk

Vols.1 and 2

FAPT LADDER PMC-L”module floppy disk

FAPT LADDER PMC-M module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J500 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201 -J500 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

A08B-9200-J600 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201-J600 #EN (IBM PCAT)

A08B-9200-J601 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201-J601 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J602 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201-J602 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

FAPT LADDER PMC-N’NAQA system floppy disk

A08B-9200-J501 #JP (PC9801)

Vols.1, 2, and 3


FAPT LADDER PMCRAlIRA2IRA3:RBiRB2/RB3/RB4/RC A08B-9200-J502 #JP (PC9801)

/RC3/RC4/PAl PAYQCNB system floppy disk

A08B-9201 -J502 #EN (IBM PC/AT)

Vols. 1, 2, and 3

FAPT LADDER PMC-RAl IRA2iRA3;PAl iPA module

floppy disk

FAPT LADDER PMC-RB1RB2’RB3.‘RB4’RC’RC3.1RC4

module floppy disk

FAPT LADDER PMC-QC module floppy disk

FAPT LADDER PMC-NB module floppy disk

A08B-9200-J603 #JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201 -J603 #EN (IBM PC’AT)

A08B-9200-J604 #JP (PC9801)


A08B-9200-J605#JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201 -J605#EN (IBM PCAT)

A08B-9200-J606#JP (PC9801)

A08B-9201-J606#EN (IBM PC AT)

l-5



2. INSTALLATION

2.1 Operating Environment

PMC model Combination

PMC-L

0.8

PMC-M

@, @

PMC-M (with MMC)

0. @I

PMC-P

0

PMC-N

@

PMC-PA1

@, @

PMC-PA3

0, ZJ

PMC-QA

@

PMC-QC

43 @

?MC-NA

6J

‘MC-NB

0, @

PMC model

Combination

PMC-RAl

0, QJ

PMC-RA2

@, @

PMC-RA3

@. QJ

PMC-RB

@, @

PMC-RB2

@, @

PMC-RB3

@, @

PMC-RC

0, @

PMC-RC3

0, @

PMC-RC4

8, @

To use the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before

installing the software, check these requirements.

Main memory

Hard disk

OS

Printer

EMS

Others

(Note

1)

(Note 2)

NEC PC9801 IBM PC/AT

Free area of 500K bytes or more is required (Note 1) (Note 2).

About 3M bytes is required for installing the system (Note 3).

MS-DOS Version 3.1 or later

PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later

NEC PR20lH

EPSON VP1 000

Epson VP1000 (Note 4)

A LIM type EMS (expanded memory specification) memory board may be

required depending on the PMC model and the size of a sequence program

to be created. For details, see 2.1.1.

The EGA graphic interface is

required.

If the standard memory size of the machine is insufficient, memory expansion is

required.

Even if the machine has 640K-byte memory, the memory may not be large enough

when an installed driver. for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free

space in main memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command CHKDSK.

l-6



2. INSTALLATION

(Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required.

(Note 4)

To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification is required.

For details, see Section 1.2 in Part II.

2.1.1 PC9801 operating environment

(1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

When starting MS-DOS, the user needs to install the following device drivers:

RSDRV.SYS

PRINT.SYS

Add the lines indicated below to CONFIG.SYS.

RSDRV.SYS and PRINT.SYS are assumed to be under the directory named gSDEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:$(DEVyRSDRV.SYS

DEVICE=A:yDEV'1CPRINT,SYS

(Note) When you are using a memory card adapter, set CONFIG.SYS referring to the

operator’s manual for the memory card adapter.

(2)

Using the expanded memory

The expanded memory specification (EMSXMS) memory can be used with the system as a

work area for a sequence program. EMSXMS memory allows a larger sequence program to

be used. (An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 or more steps to be

edited.)

If EMSXMS memory is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be

handled when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.

Ladder diagram editing cannot output drawings if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot

be allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident device drivers. In this

case, EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed that the setting described below ensures normal operation.

MS-DOS Version 3.38 (for the PC-9801 Series)

Machine with a 80386:80386SX CPU

Specify the statement below as the first DEVICE statement of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each

device driver is assumed to be under the directory named DEV on drive A.

(Note)

When an EMS board and EMS device driver are used, change the CONFIGSYS file

according to the manufacture’s manual.

l-7



2. INSTALLATION

Expanded memory (EMS)

Extended memory (XMS)

EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more

(recommended) (Kate

1)

* Better to include EMS of 256 kbyte

or more

(Note 2)

Note 1) The quantity of the EMS and XMS memory effects on the performance to handle

Symbol data and Net comment.

Please prepare enough EMS or XMS memory

specially for Symbol data or Net comment of large number.

Note 2)

At the system with EMS less than 256 kbytes, the maximum number of steps which

FAPT LADDER can handle may be restricted. Please prepare 256 kbytes or more

EMS if possible.

About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:

Although FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS nor XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory

according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance.

1)

2)

3)

EMS memory for Ladder

sequence program

FAPT LADDER uses EMS memory for Ladder sequence program if available.

When no EMS memory is found,

the convenGonal memory is used, and the size of

conventional memory may restrict the number of steps able to be edited.

Ladder sequence program occupies 256 kbyte of EMS, regardless of the type of PMC, or

the size of the ladder sequence program to edit.

EMS

and

XMS

memory for Symbol & Comment data

FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data if available.

When neither of them are available, FAPT LADDER will make temporary file on the hard

drive, and processing large number of Symbol & Comment data may be slower.

About 200 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data.

EMS

and

XMS

memory for Net comment

For Net comment, FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or temporary file

as same as Symbol & Comment data.

About 200 to 300 kbytes of

EMS or XMS

memory are used

for every 1,000 Net comments.

(3) Using a Japanese

language input

FEP

FAPT LADDER for

PC9801

allows comments in Japanese to be entered on the symbol and

comment editing screen. (See Section 51.3.)

For Japanese language input, a front-end processor (FEP) for Japanese language input is

required.

For information about the installation and operation of an FEP, see the relevant

manual.

1-8



2. INSTALLATION

The following Japanese language input FEPs can be used:

Supplier

NEC

Driver name

NECAlKl. DRV

NECAIK2. DRV

Memory size required

About 130K bytes

Remarks

Al step-by-step conversion

Al multiple-block conversion

Step-by-step conversion

Multiple-block conversion

NECDIC. DRV

Just Systems ATOKGA. SYS

ATOKGB. SYS

About 40K bytes

Single-block conversion

About 100K bytes ATOKG

ATOK7A. SYS

ATOK7B. SYS

About 115K bytes

ATOK

When the EMS is used

Main : 50K bytes

EMS : 64K bytes

1

Note the following points on Japanese language input:

(a)

(W

(c)

60

09

When a Japanese language input FEP is activated (in the Japanese language input mode),

the Japanese language input FEP displays data on a section of the screen. As a result, the

FAPT LADDER screen may temporarily be in disarray. However, the FAPT LADDER

screen returns to normal when Japanese language input is completed (Japanese language

input mode is terminated).

When a comment is entered using only Japanese, up to 14 characters can be entered.

A comment entered in Japanese can be displayed on the editing screen or printed out, but

cannot be written into a ROM cassette or transferred to the PMC. At compile time, a

message is output indicating this restriction and all Japanese characters are converted to

blanks. Note, however, that sequence program operation is not affected.

A Japanese language input FEP is installed as a resident driver in the system. This means

that memory available to FAPT LADDER is reduced accordingly. Check that the size of

memory usable for FAPT LADDER is 500K bytes or more to allow FAPT LADDER

execution.

Editing alone can be performed without installing PRINT.SYS and RSDRV.SYS in order to

allocate a free area of 500K bytes. Note that when FILES or BUFFERS is specified in

CONFIG.SYS. a main memory size of 1K bytes is used per file (buffer) specified. Make

adjustments as required.

A Japanese language input FEP can also be installed with ADDDRV and DELDRV by using

a subprocess after calling COMMAND.COM in user batch execution.

An example is provided below.

l - 9



2. INSTALLATION

2.1.2

(1)

First. change the contents of FLMNE.BAT under the directory where FAPT LADDER is

insta”ed, as follows:

FLMNE. BAT

r

OMMAND

In ddition, create a file with the name FEP.DEF with the definitions below. The example

below assumes use of ATOK7. For detailed information, see the manual of the relevant

FEP.

FEP.DEF

DEVICE=A:YDEV+ATOK7A.SYS/D=A:+ATOK7L.DIC

DEVICE=A:YDEV)CATOK7B.SYS

>

Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu, and select F3 (user batch file

execution). The following message appears:

Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'.

Add

parameter(s)?

[A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Enter N to return to MS-DOS. Execute the following commands to install and remove the

FEP:

ADDDRV FEP.DEF

DELDRV

1

(To install the FEP)

(To remove the FEP)

The user can return to FAPT LADDER by pressing Fi .

IBM PC/AT operating environment

CONFIGSYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

The system uses ANSI-based escape sequences.

Therefore, ANSI.SYS needs to be installed

using CONFIG.SYS.

Add the line indicated below to CONFIG.SYS.

ANSI.SYS is assumed to be under directory \DEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:\DEV\ANSI.SYS

l - 10



2. INSTALLATION

(2)

Using EMS

The expanded memory specification (EMS) memory can be used with the system as a work

area for a sequence program. The EMS memory allows a larger sequence program to be

used. (An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 steps to be edited.)

If EMS memory is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be handled

when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.)

Ladder diagram editing cannot be started if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot be

allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident device drivers. In this case,

EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed that the setting described below ensures normal operation.

MS-DOS Version 4.0

Specify the statements below as the first DEVICE statements of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each

device driver is assumed to be under directory \DEV on drive A.

DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMAEM.SYS

DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMA2EMS.SYS FRAME=COOO

2.2 Installation Procedure

An installation batch file is used to install the programs on the system and module floppy disks.

(See (3))

Note that there are two different installation procedures. They are selected according to the type

and edition of the system.

0 Installation of ordinary files (see item (1) for the procedure.)

The programs on the following system and module floppy disks are distributed in ordinary

file format.

-

PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) editions 06.1 and earlier

.

PMC-N system floppy disk (A08B-920019201 -JSOl)

.

PMC-RB RC system floppy disk (A08B-9200/9201 -J502) editions 07.1 and earlier

*

All module floppy disks

@ Installation of compressed files (see item (2) for the procedure.)

The programs on the following system and floppy disks are distributed in compressed file

format.

*

PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) editions 06.2 and earlier

*

PMC-RBRC system floppy disk (AO8B-9200/9201-J502) editions 08.0 and earlier

Note 1)

The installation procedure of the programs on each floppy disk is subject to change.

Before starting installation, refer to a README.DOC file (if there is one). If there is no

README.DOC, use the ordinary file format installation procedure

(1).

1-11



2. INSTALLATION

Note 2)

The compressed file is a self-extracting file produced using an archive program utility

named LHA. LHA is freeware created by Mr. Haruyasu Yoshizaki.

(1)

Installation procedure for ordinary

files on system floppy disks

The following procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMC-N

system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed in the directory Y FLADDER created on the hard

disk drive (C:).

[Operation]

Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following commands to execute an installation batch file.

B:Y> CD INSTALL

B:YINSTALL> INSTALL B:Y C:+FLADDER

0

When the following message appears, confirm it, and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to C:\ FLADDER

(HARD DISK)

SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\

When stop "CTRL+C"

Press any key to continue

If it is necessary to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the

batch file.

VOLI is installed on the hard disk.

When the following message appears, insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and

press any key.


When stop "CTRLtC"


VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.


press any key.


When stop "CTRLtC"



1-12



2. INSTALLATION

(2)

9 The following message

appears.

Installation procedure for compressed files on system floppy disks

The following procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMC-

RB.‘RC system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed in the directory Y FLADDER created on the

hard disk drive (A:).

[Procedure ]

Note

Note

Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.

Enter the following commands to execute an installation batch file.

I

:Y> CD INSTALL

B:YINSTALL> INSTALL 9: A:YFLADDERY

I

1)

When specifying the files to be installed, enter only their drive name; do not specify a

directory (that is, do not enter 4h .

2)

When specifying the directory in which the system is to be installed, suffix it with

Y .

When the following message appears, confirm it. and press any key.

SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to A:\ FLADDER

(HARD DISK)


When stop "CTRL+C"


If it is necessary to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the

batch file.

VOLl is installed on the hard disk.


press any key.


When stop "CTRLtC"



1-13



2. INSTALLATION

When the following message appears. insert the system floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and

press any key.

SET [SYSTEM FD Vo1.3) on DRIVE B:\

When stop "CTRL+C"


@I VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.

@I The following message appears.

(End/

(3) Installation batch files

The following table lists the installation batch files and their directories.

File name

Directory

@ PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk LMPINSTSAT

Ic INSTALL

8 PMC-L module floppy disk LINST.BAT

Y

$J PMC-M module floppy disk

MINST.BAT

Y

@ PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk MMINSTBAT

gc

@J PMC-NINAQA system floppy disk INSTALL.BAT +J NSTALL

@ PMC-

INSTALL.BAT

qC NSTALL

RA~/RA~J’AA~RB:‘RB~;RBYRB~/‘RC~RC~ RC~/PA

1 PA3IQCINB system floppy disk

(3 PMC-RAl RA2IRAS/PAl IPA3 module floppy disk

RA12lNST.BAT Y INSTALL

EMC-RB RB2/RB3;RB4IRCIRC3iRC4 module

RBRCINST.BAT

Y INSTALL

floppy disk

?) PMC-QC module floppy disk

QCINST.BAT

Y INSTALL

I@ PMC-NB module floppy disk NBINST.BAT

gC NSTALL

(Note) Systems for different PMC models can be installed in the same directory. However,

restrictions may be placed depending on the edition of the software. See Appendix

9 for details. For systems that cannot be installed in the same directory, install them

in separate directories.

1

- 14



3. ACTIVATION

3. ACTIVATION

(1) Activation method

[Operation]

Activate FAPT LADDER with

the following commands:

B:\>A:

A:\xD \FLADDER

A: \FLADDER> FLADDER

(Note

1)

The initial screen displaying the version of the system and copyright is displayed and the

message below appears.

When a key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed, the main menu below appears.

Select a screen by selecting the function key corresponding to the desired menu item

displayed at the bottom of the main menu screen.

Fi KEY : SETUP

F8 KEY : MNEMONI C DI T

F9 KEY : UT[Ll Tt

Fl O KEY : END

Select a menu item with the corresponding function key.

(Note)

Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the drive and directory in which the

system file exists to the current drive and current directory. If FAPT LADDER is

started up with path designation, or by specifying the current directory, FAPT

LADDER may malfunction.

1-15



3. ACTIVATION

Reference:

When an FL.BAT has been created in the directory for which path control is set,

FAPT LADDER can be activated by just typing FL and pressing the [RETURN]

key. An example of a batch file is provided below.

FL.BAT

ECHO OFF

A:

(Moves to the drive where the system files are installed.)

cD \FLADDER

(Moves to the directory where the system files are installed.)

FLADDER

(2)

Termination method

[Operation]

0 Select [END] from the main menu, or press the < ESC > key to return to the initial screen.

Then the following message appears:

END? (Y:END, 0THER:RESllME MENU)

8 Enter Y to return to the MS-DOS command mode. Enter N to return to the main menu.

l-16



4. BASIC OPERATION

4. BASIC OPERATION

4.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

MS-DOS

$- 4

initial screen

f 4

Main menu-

Fl

Edit

“’

itle data

Ladder diagram

Symbol and comment

Message

I/O module

System parameter

Print

Execution

l-Setting

qz[TEXEC

Compression (PMC-R seriesKXiNB)

c

(PMC-N/NA/RC/RC3 QC4;QC/NB)

LPASCAL (PMC-N, NA)

-PMC writer, FA writer Read

Write

Verification

Blank

check

-PMC

-E

Download

Upload

Comparison

-Handy file/Floppy cassette adapter

-Memory card

(Note 1)

The format of the source program of this system is different from that of FAPT

LADDER for the P Series. Thts system uses the mnemonic edit function (F8) to edit a

file having the format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.

(Note 2)

An object file has the ROM format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series. This system

reads a sequence program created by the P Series In the ROM file format. The format

of the floppy disk must be converted.

1-17



Diagram of relationships among the functions of the system

P-G -

FAPT

LADDER

- . . .

i Source i

; format

:s

: program i

: . . . .

. . . . . .

;

ROM ;

; format

:4

: program I

: . . . .

FAPT

PASCAL -

. . .

: PASCAL ;

: load

:-

:module i

. . . .

U-inch

ffOPPY

3.5inch

ffOPPY

-+I+

35inch

ffOPPY

- PC9801 - IBM-PC/AT

- FAPT LADDER

Edit

Setup

qzq+J4

ASC format

FLOAD98 IFLOADAT

+q+-+

Binary format

II

I

I

FLPGMS

k-1 Q I +

1 I

Binary format

ASC format

v ::

Communication by FEZ-2324

(Refer to Appendix 1 for cables)

fg-pii?-~-

Q-l_),

3.5inch

ff

PPY

CNC -

Memorv



4. BASIC OPERATION

4.2 Common System Operations

The operations described below are basic operations applicable to all screens.

(1)

Function keys

When the menu items shown below are displayed in reverse video, the user can select the

desired menu item by pressing the corresponding function key.

.:,:.. ‘j’., .j’.,

, ;z:,i,:lE D,T,i,j,I:(

j; :... ..:. ‘j. ;::i,:

pR,$& )j:..:::::; :.:_. ./ .::.?::is z

3 :;C*MP,i..: 4 j .&&...y s :;.“:;&

:y ; fj&“:‘:‘:q ,

y:)):., .., :,.: ::::..::

:.: ::...: .j,“. .,, ::: ;;:‘.

;::.;&“p~:., * .;&JE+

9

,

:,:

: :. ::

5 :.>::;:;;g( +j ,,

,,

WI

PI

F31

IF41

WI F61

( F , ]

WI

WI IF101

(2)

Escape key

The escape key <ESC> has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The

escape key terminates the current screen then returns the display to the previous screen in the

menu hierarchy.

(3)

Cursor keys

The

cursor keys < t >, < 1 >, < + >, and < + > are used to move the cursor to

select input items.

When two or more cursors can be used on a single screen, the second or subsequent cursor

can be moved by pressing the <SHIFT> key together with the < + > or -z -+ > key.

(4)

Scroll

keys

The scroll keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display the

previous one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively (for

the PC9801).

The scroll keys <PAGE DOWN > and <PAGE UP> display the next page and the previous

page, respectively (for the IBM PC/AT).

(5)

[INS]

key

This key switches between the overwrite mode c 0 > and insert mode -z I >.

(9)

[HELP] key

When the < HELP > key is pressed, help information may be output for the specified item.

1-19



4. BASIC OPERATION

(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

ain

menu

PMC-RB2 <O>[A::FLADDER

1

(8)

t-

Item name

t

Model currently selected

currently selected

L

Current

directory name

Edit mode (overwritefinsert)

(Note) The indications on the key tops may slightly vary from the descriptions of this

manual. depending on the personal computer used.

Pop-up menu

When the following pop-up menu appears, the desired process

the three methods described below.

can be selected using any of

The file already exists.

Fl Update

F2 Quit

F3 Append

1)

2)

3)

Cursor movement

To select an item, press the cursor key < ? > or c 1 >, such that the item to be selected

is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN> key selects that item.

Function key

A function key is indicated at the left of each item. To select an item, press the

corresponding function key.

Command name

An uppercase letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command name. In the

above case, pressing the letter key -z U >, <Cl>, or <A> can select the Update. Quit, or

Append command, respectively.

l-20



4. BASIC OPERATION

4.3

Model Setting

In this case, the user needs to select the PMC model by selecting [SETUP] before selectrng

another menu item. This setting, once executed, is preserved (i.e. setup need not be repeated).

[Operation]

Select [SETUP].

The setup menu is displayed. (The screen is of PMC-R08.0 version)

PUCM

PICRA?

PUCRA3

PUGRB

pcuc;;;

PUCRB4

PICRB4 (STEP Sp

PMCRC

*PWCRC3

PVCAC4

PVCRC4 (STEP SW

PUCPA

PUCPA3

PVCPC

PVCNB

Select the PMC model using the arrow keys.

Press the <RETURN > key. Then the following message appears and the model name

displayed in the status line changes.

Setup completed.

Select [END].

The display returns to the setup menu screen.

Select [END].

The display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note)

When PMC-NA is used, select PMC-N (l/O) on the above screen.

l-21



5. OPERATION

5. OPERATION

5.1 Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited.

(1) Start

[Operation]

0 Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

Mm WC>

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\~~~~~~~~~~ .:’ j ; >&:j

Fl KEY

EDI T

F2 KEY : PRI NT

F3 KEY : COMPI LE

F4 KEY : OECO?kPl LE

Fj KEY : LI NK

F6 KEY : I / O

Fi KEY : SETUP

FB KEY : MNEMONI C DI T

F9 KEY : UTI LI TY

F10 KEY : END

@ The following source file name input screen is displayed:

l-22



5. OPERATION

6 Enter the name of a source program to be edited.

No more than 36 characters can be entered to specify a program name.

An

MS-DOS

file name must be entered (extension (.xXx) must be excluded).

(i) When a new file is created

+

6

utput

Specify the OUTPUT PROGRAM NAME only.

program

(ii) When an existing file is edited directly

6

/O

Specify the same program name in the INPUT PROGRAM NAME

program

field and OUTPUT PROGRAM NAME field.

(ii) When an existing file is modified and its contents are stored in a separate file

I=7

input

nrnnram

Specify the name of the existing file to be edited in the

INPUT PROGRAM NAME field. Specify the name of the file

, y’vy’““’ ,

in which to store the program in the OUTPUT PROGRAM

< 2 L-2 NAME field.

To specify a file that exists in the current directory displayed at the status line, enter the file

name. To specify a file in another directory, enter the relative path and the file name.

Example) A : iFLADDER ‘7

t

-IT

Current directory

L

DATA ‘- SAMPLE1

i-- SAMPLE2

In this case, the following two lines specify the same file.

A:‘FLADDER’DATA’SAMPLEl

DATA’sAMPLE

l-23



5. OPERATION

@ The following editing menu screen appears:

ED T

i x-x Q NA: wADI ; i R\

I

FI kEY : TI TLE

I ?? RY : LWDEK DI %R+

F3 m :

SMKI L 6 CONEI I T

F4 KFI : , WSAGE

F5 KEY :

I , ; 0I DLLE

FE hEY :

SYSTMP. J &WTER

Fl O kEY : E l u

($3 Select data to be edited with the corresponding function key.

$3 The editing screen for the selected data appears.

For example, the screen below is

displayed when [TITLE] is selected.

EDIT TITLL : fPf.z-fc \\ ,slb~:‘at. :\ :’ :: ” f

51 EDI TI OS O

6) PROCRMI l l ~~ hl V60

7) MT\ OF I ' RO(; f f i l WG

8) PRG- XI I HI CSEDBY

9) RUMhRI TTL5 Y

1

?

3 4 5 6 i R 9 10 mu

(2) Termination

[Operation]

Q Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

G3 The following message appears:

l-24



5. OPERATION

(3 Press the desired function key.

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

When UPDATE is selected, the editing operation is terminated after the results of

editing are written to a file.

When QUIT is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results

of editing to a file.

When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.

@ When UPDATE or QUIT is selected, the display returns to the editing menu screen.

(i)

To continue editing, select the appropriate function key.

(ii) To terminate editing, select [END]. The display returns to the main menu.

5.1.1

Title data editing

Title data represents the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

(1) Start

[Operation]

0 Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

@ The following title editing screen appears:

(2) Input

EMT ( TI TLE )

M -i s 6hfA: ' ZtNXI % \

: I Xt LC ' 41C- HNELC & Fl t NI

f

[Operation]

0 Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 > and <

1 > keys.

l-25



5. OPERATION

e Enter data.

The maximum number of characters usable for each title data item is listed below.

MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :

32 characters

MACHINE TOOL NAME

: 32 characters

CNC b NC NAME

: 32 characters

PMC PROGRAM NO

: 4 characters

EDITION NO

: 2 characters

PROGRAM DRAWING NO

: 32 characters

DATE OF PROGRAMMING

: 16 characters

PROGRAM DESIGNED BY

: 32 characters

ROM WRITTEN BY

: 32 characters

REMARKS

: 32 characters

(3) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END] on press the c ESC > key to return to the editing menu screen.

0 The following message appears.

Fl Update

F2 Quit

F3

Edit

0 Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing menu.

5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing

In ladder diagram editing, the user can perform sequence program input, addition, deletion, and

search operations.

(1) Start

[Operation]

@ Select [LADDER] (LADDER DIAGRAM) from the editing menu.

1-26



5. OPERATION

(a)

09

(c)

W)

The following ladder diagram editing screen appears:

u StBl PO001

:sp

l-AD=xooo.

QTEST

0

SY=S:rFE 00026552 -

DATA NO I 0110306553S -

H- z+F- 3-a 4+3 %ztn + c--,-.. 6 t 9 _t 1ocuBm

When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown. (For the [View] command,

see (5) “Connecting Sequence Program” in Section 3.1.1 of the supplement.)

The line shows the name of the file which is being edited, number of the net which is

displayed on the screen, and the number of program steps’maximum number of steps that

can be edited.

The line shows a sub-program number (P address) or label number (L address).

The lines show a symbol and comment added to the data at the address selected by the

cursor.

@ AD = X000.0

: Address on which the cursor is placed

8 SY = SAMPLE

: Symbol

000216552 Number of current symbols Maximum number of

symbols

@ CO = TEST DATA NO.1

: Comment

0003Of65535 Number of characters specified in the comment/

Maximum number of characters permitted in the

comment

1-27



5. OPERATION

(2) Function key indications

and selection

The ladder diagram editing

functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

“-@

[coman_d]

Q Under condition CD),holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items.

r

::.>,:.:.,.:c.::~:~;:i:.:jl

::,:..:,:.:.\.:.:.:,:,: ... I. ..,

.:g:.:;er:.,_:~:::~i,~.~:1:I:I.~::1:1:::1:~.:81’:~~~.~:~~:~::.:,: .v.w ,l:...

. .:.:,:,~.:.:.:,:.:.:,::.:

:::::.i’:.:...:.:.:.:,~:.:.:.:.:.:.

;::,::,::::: :.:...:.

, ~~~~~~~ 2 ;,$; &k&; 3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~~~~~~:;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 6 :~:~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~“~:~~:~~~~~~~~~,~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~Oii,i’~::i:;~~~I~:::::ii

>::.:_:...:.:.::.__,...):.:_:.:.‘.l.,. >: . ._.... .y.._ ..\.,.:.:.:.:s...I :,

:..:.:

,.:..:.:.:.:_..::: .:,~):.:.:,‘..,, ,:.:Q..:.)

.i:: ,.,.,.,.,.,,,_,., .~)~);:_:_:.):.:‘:.:.::.~.,..:.:,.,.i,.,.,__.

@ [Delnet]

@ [Search]

. . ,. . : ,. .. . .., .,. ,.

. . ::..:.:...:..: . ..:,_,).)::

::,.,:.‘. ,,., ,

5 ;;,;;w&& 6 ;,&&i; ““‘: :i$&“.~. 8 ;. .,~&~:~~.Y: ‘_.,:_‘,:‘:l:;,~.;i’:i0,:: ;&.;;;:;I..

:.:’ ., : .C,‘.‘:’ ,.,.,:,..: :

..“.

CB

[Copy1

1

Wove1

I

$$&;:;.;

2

:l~a;~&;:

3 :

.karch ..I

4 ‘i_down 5 .t;“p,.,

6 ,.,

7.;, . . . . . . . ‘3.

,A

”

:.,,:,:: Y.

8

” .” ’

.:. ..I’ :,. . .

. .x. ‘.

g .Y’ .: --<;.I’, . ::

. .

I

., :. .,<. y

:::;t+r

Lj:;::.tii:.:.::..?

.

*

:. 3 :~..~&~ch

: 4 ‘:&own

5

c-up

6

tO-fil

7.

to J.

8.

,:

g

.:

,,

:

: i.‘, 10 .:,

* [to-org) is displayed in the [File] command mode only. (Thus can be selected.)

@I [File]

Opens a window in which the name of an input program can be specified. Select desired

processing from a POP-UP menu.

9 [

sy

Edit]

I

0xec 2

cancel

3

4

5

6

7

8 9

10

I

1-28



5. OPERATION

(3)

(Note)

While the function keys of @ are displayed in ladder diagram editing, a command of

Q can be executed. For example, entering <A > and [COMAND] on the @ screen

has the same effect as selecting F4 [Adress] on the .a screen. To select a

command of 8 in this way, enter the upper-case letter (not necessarily initial letter)

in the corresponding command name shown on the 8 screen.

Sequence program input

For sequence program input, select [LADDER] from the editing menu. The function key

programmer menu is displayed. When no sequence program has been entered, the screen

displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.

At this stage, program input can be started.

Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram.

Examples of basic instruction program input and function instruction program input are shown

below.

(a)

Example

of basic instruction program input

I

x0.1

D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7

3

[Operation ]

Move the cursor to the start position, then press [ -I I- 1.

The [ -I I- ] symbol appears on the screen. The message “HORIZONTAL LINE

ILLEGAL” appears at the lower-right corner of the screen. This message warns the

user that horizontal ladder diagram line creation is not completed. Enter an address

and bit data.

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard and press the < RETURN > key. The address is set at

the contact, and the cursor moves right.

As in @ and 8, enter contact A of 030.2.

Enter contact B of F14.2.

Press [ e ] and enter address F14.2. then press the <RETURN> key. The

address is set on contact B and the cursor moves right.

Without moving the cursor, press [ 4 1.

A horizontal line segment extending to the right is drawn automatically and a relay coil

symbol appears near the right vertical rail.

l-29



5. OPERATION

(b)

Example of function instruction program input

Enter address Y52.7. then press the <RETURN > key.

The cursor automatically moves to the input start position on the next line.

Next, enter an OR condition.

Press [ + ] and enter address X2.4, then press the <RETURN > key.

The address is set at contact 6 and the cursor moves right.

Press [ - ] to enter a horizontal line.

To enter a horizontal line, enter a number and press the horizontal line key

[

- 1. The line segment will be entered as many times as the number entered.

Note, however, that such a line never exceeds the right vertical rail.

A vertical line extending upward is required for OR. Press [ d ] to enter a

vertical line extending upward.

For function instruction input, press the function key [functnj. Next, enter a SUB number,

then press the <RETURN> key.

A function instruction can also be entered by entering the function instruction name or SUB

number and pressing the [functn] key.

If the user does not remember a certain instruction name or SUB number, a function

instruction table that lists function instructions and corresponding SUB numbers can be

displayed on the screen.

The table can be displayed just by pressing the [functn] key without entering any data.

Then the function instruction table is automatically displayed.

Press the [functn] key to return to the ladder diagram screen from the function instruction

table.

ACT

1 MOVE

Control condition

-It-- MOVE

SUB 8

.

I

(1)

(2)

I

(3) (4)

0000 0000 0000 0000

H

LL

- Output address

Input data address

Low-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

High-order 4-bit logical multiplication data

When entering a function instruction with this function, enter the

parameters of the function instruction vertically as shown below.

0000 -c-(l)

0000 --(,a

0000 -(3)

0000

-(4)

l-30



5. OPERATION

[Operation]

@ Enter a control condition.

Press [ -i t- 1. Next, enter an address and bit data, then press the <RETURN>

key. The cursor moves right.

Q Enter a function instruction.

Press the [functn] key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then press the <RETURN > key.

The function instruction diagram shown above appears.

& Enter the oarameters of the function instruction.

First, enter the high-order 4-bit logical multiplication data of the first parameter, then

press the <RETURN > key. The cursor automatically moves downwards. Enter the

remaining three parameters one by one.

(c) Restrictions and notes on ladder creation

[Restrictions]

@ Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portion between the RD

and WRT instructions)

a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the

corresponding mnemonic program), the following message appears:

“A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.”

If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

@ Restrictions related to a ladder diagram display per screen

If an attempt is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error

described below occurs.

a) Symptom

(a-l) When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following message appears.

“The NET being created is too large.”

If 70 lines are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is

displayed.

“A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.”

(a-2) When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets, the following

message appears.


If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following

message appears for a net that is the current net when 70 lines are exceeded,

and the display of the current net is discontinued.

“The NET is larger than the editing buffer.”

In this case, specify the net to be displayed. rrsing the ladder diagram search

function (such as net number search).

b) How to obtain the number of lines per screen

Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

l-31



5. OPERATION

total for that screen. In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line.

The number of lines in each net to be displayed is determined as follows:

(b-l) Basic instructions

One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

b-1- 1 line

L-I *lines

(b-2) Function instructions

The number of lines in a function instruction is: The number of control conditions

or parameters, whichever is greater, plus 1

Examples of calculation follow.

- When the number of control conditions < number of parameters

RST

r

umber of control conditions = 2

Number of parameters = 4

Number of lines = number of

parameters + 1 = 5 lines

- When the number of control conditions > number of parameters

RlOO

Number of control conditions = 3

Number of parameters = 1

Number of lines

= number of control

conditions + 1 = 4 lines

1-32



5. OPERATION

(b-3)

Data table section of function instructions

The data table section of the COD, CODB, or DISP instruction is calculated as

follows:

When the data table is one or two bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables16 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

0000

0000

0000

0000

0000 0000

Number of lines in the data table

0000 0000 section = 11/6

0000

0000

0000

1

= 1 with remainder 5

= 2 lines

I

When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines = number of data tables/4 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

SUB 27 0005

CODB

0007

0300

D320

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

00000000

1

umber of lines in the data table

section = 514

= 1 with remainder 1

= 2 lines

l-33



5. OPERATION

(b-4)

Example of calculating the number of lines per screen

For the ladder shown below, the number of fines in the screen display section is

obtained as follows:

- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B.

- Number of lines in net A

Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines

-I-+

8 lines

(3+1)

(1116)

I

- The number of lines in net B is 2.

ACT

Net A

r

-

Screen display section

. . . .

Net B

: . . . .

Net C

. . . . . . .

.

I

.

000

003

006

009

SUB 49

0011

DISP

0003

T

300

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

0000 0000

0000 0000

0000 0000

0000 0000

. . . . . . . . . . .

0000

0000

0000

.

........

........

c) Examples of symptoms

Example of symptom (a-l)

-

The ladder diagram can be edited only when the “total number

parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396.

the total number of steps is 396, the net consists of 70 lines.

of message data steps”

This is because when

If a net that consists of a total of 396 steps or more is created during mnemonic

editing, the following message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.

“The data table is too large.”

1-34



5. OPERATION

Example of symptom (a-2)

-

If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function instruction on the same screen as

that of a basic instruction, the following message is displayed, and the attempt is

rejected.


For example, if the basic instruction net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction (SUB 8)

cannot be entered, (because the total number of lines exceeds 70). The results of

calculation are described below.

. t+r

isplay screen

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

: . . .

68-line net

Number of MOVE

i instruction lines =

i number of parameters

; (4) + 1 = 5

.. 68 + 5

= 73 lines

< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the MOVE instruction can be entered.

_

A basic instruction net cannot be entered together with another basic-instruction net, if

the total number of lines is greater than 70.

For example, if a 68-line basic-instruction net is followed by another basic-instruction net,

the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.

Display screen

I+‘+

,..................................................._.___.....,_...........................

I . . . . :: j .I...l

] 68-line net

< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled. the latter basic instruction can be entered.

- When the CODB instruction (SUB 27) and DISP instruction (SUB 49) are edited on the

same screen, if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message data

steps for the DISP instruction (SUB 49) the following message appears, and the

l-35



5. OPERATION

attempt is rejected.


This symptom also occurs in a combination of two DISP instructions and a combination of

CODB and COD instructions.

For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200, the total number of

steps for the DISP instruction can be only 66 at maximum. The calculation results are

shown below.

Display screen

. . . . . .

FIST

-II-

ACT

-II-

000

00000000

00000000

002 00000000 00000000

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

196

00000000

00000000

198 00000000

00000000

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 bytes

200 data tables

.

.

I[

. .

Number of CODB

_ instruction lines = 55

Function instruction

section

= 4 parameters

+ 1

Data table section

= 20014 = 50

I_

alculation of DISP

- instruction data items -

that can be entered

Function instruction

sections

= 3 parameters

+ 1

Number of remaining

lines

= 70 - 55 - 4

= 11 lines

Data tables

= 11%=66

< Measure >

Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen makes it possible to set the

total number of steps to 396.

8 Restriction on the maximum number of steps

The maximum number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows:

Without EMS : 21840 steps

With EMS : 24000 steps

Note, however, that the maximum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending

on how memory is used.

If a ladder being edited exceeds the maximum allowable number of steps, editing is

disabled and the following message is displayed:

MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER

l-36



5. OPERATION

(4)

(5)

[Notes]

CD An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the

ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.

A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.

Q Up to eight contacts and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.

However, this restriction does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic

format. When a sequence program created in mnemonic format exceeds this limit, it is

displayed over several lines with a continuation symbol.

This continuation symbol cannot be deleted with [ ----- 1. Use [Delnet] (net

deletion) to delete this symbol. (See Item (6) in this section.)

Replacing sections of a sequence program

Lines in an already created sequence program can be replaced

in Item (3) above.

in the same way as described

Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter

new data.

Sequence program addition

Press the [comand] soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys

indicated below.

To terminate the programmer menu, press the < ESC > key.

I

I,

&&t’

.......................

:

.................:......................................

.. .... .... ...

..

.... :.

~::::&I&:1 > &if:‘$::

:zi~~~~~~::

~$z$,$@:i;i

.

.................

: :..:.q.::::. :;. ‘,,::::

:,: : :.:.:.:

. . : :::‘.:+~:.~~x~

: .: ,y,:: ... . . :, . ..... .:‘:::I

... ................

.:::.y

$&&$ ~~~;fjiii.~~~

$zzyrdit:::;,

.................:.:.:::::::::::::: ........y.. .........

,.:’ :: ,.:,:: ... .::..: .: .... .:::::.:.:.

........

... : : ::.:. .:::.:

[Insert]

As described below, there are four types of sequence program addition in a ladder diagram.

(a) Example: when a relay contact is added on a line

Addition on a line

Move the cursor to the position to add item(s), then enter item(s) in the way described in

Item (3) above.

l-37



5. OPERATION

When a vertical line affects addition

[Operation]

Move the cursor to the position shown above.

Press [

4

] to delete the vertical line to the left extending upward. This

disappears.

Press [

A ] to create a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor,

then press [ -

). A horizontal line and vertical line are created.

Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact is to be added.

Press [ -j j- ] to add a contact.

(b) When a line is added vertically

-To be added

To add a line vertically. an area

lower part of the ladder diagram

cursor to any point in the ladder

key.

is required for the addition. To create

such an area, the

must be shifted down by one line. To

do this, move the

diagram enclosed in dashed lines, then

press the [insnet]

Each time the [insnet] key is pressed, the lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted one

line down to create an area for addition. Make an addition in this area.

After line addition, any remaining area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area

large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation]

@ Move the cursor to any point in the ladder dragram enclosed in dashed lines.

G? Press [insnet].

The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.

l-38



5. OPERATION

When the [insnet] key is pressed without entering a numeric value, one line is inserted.

When the [insnet] key is pressed after entering a numeric value, the number of

specified is inserted.

Move the cursor to the desired position and press [ -_( l-j. Then set address

and press the <RETURN > key. The the cursor moves right.

Press the [ L ] soft key to create an OR circuit.

lines

data

(c) Line insertion in a single-net sequence program

Blank lines are inserted one by one.

[Operation)

0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the [insfin] key. The entered

number of lines is inserted.

(When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

If the [inslin] key is pressed when the cursor is positioned as shown in the left-hand

figure. a blank line is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure.

(d) Element insertion

in a single-net sequence program

Elements are added one by one.

[Operation]

0 Enter the number of elements to be inserted, then press the [inselm] key. The entered

number of elements is inserted.

If the character <A> is prefixed to the number of elements to be inserted and the

[inselm] key is pressed. elements are inserted after the cursor.

(If the [inselm] key is pressed without entering the number of elements to be inserted,

just one element is inserted.)

_‘~&$+ -

, <c..mm I I

II

n.. :.>:.....:.>:... (

I

4

Cursor

1-39



5. OPERATION

If the (inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is placed as shown in the left-hand

figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-hand figure. The element is

inserted before the cursor.

If the character <A> is entered and the [inselm] key is pressed when the cursor is

placed as Shown in the left-hand figure, an element is inserted as shown in the right-

hand figure. The element is inserted after the cursor.

-_ -

(6)

Deletion in asequence program

(a) A program can be partially deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted

-_

&td pressing one of the below three soft keys

[

e__--

1 :

Deletes a horizontal line, relay contact, relay coil, etc.

[4

I:

Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the left of the cursor.

1

2 ] :

Deletes a vertical line extending upward to the right of the cursor.

(b) Use the [Delnet] key to delete a program net (section from an RD instruction to a WRT

instruction).

(c) Multiple nets can

be

deleted one by one.

[Delnet]

1

[Operation]

Deletion

Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, then press the [Delnet] key. The net to be

deleted is displayed in red.

Deleting multiple nets

Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, or [search]

key, then display the nets to be deleted In red.

If

the [c-down] key is pressed after a

numeric value is entered. the cursor moves as many times as the entered numeric

value.

Execution : Press the [exec] key.

Cancellation : Press the [cancel] key.

l-40



5. OPERATION

@ When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to

delete, enter the number of nets to delete. then press the [Delnet] key. With this

operation, steps G and 8 can be omitted.

(7)

Searching in a sequence program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

(Search1

1

When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence

and the cursor is moved to the start of the program.

(b) [bottom]

program is displayed on the screen

When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and

the cursor is moved to the end of the program.

(c) [srchl

Search operation using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the

current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When an address

is found, it is displayed on the screen. An address to search for can be specified in one of

two ways.

0 Address specification usina the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]

key. This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current

location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

If the specified address is found, the section of the program containg the address is

displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move.

To terminate searching, press the c ESC > key.

l-41



5. OPERATION

Gll.6

-- When the same address as this address

Y49.1

is to be searched for. move the cursor to

this position, then press the (srch] key.

D32.0

Address soecification bv address inout

Enter the address to find with the keyboard, then press the [srch] key.

This operation searches the program for the specified address from the current location

of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

When the specified address is found, the section of the program containing the address

is displayed on the screen. The cursor is automatically positioned at the found

address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears.

04

(w-srch] (WRT coil search)

II

F54.1 ,.“’

x0.4 -

II .

II

x0.5

GE.1

021.2

When the same address is found,

the cursor moves to this location.

This key is used to search the program for a relay coil with a specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When a relay coil

is found. it is displayed on the screen.

If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the

closest to the cursor is displayed

The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in one of two ways.

@ Address soecification usino the cursor

Move the cursor to the relay coil with the address to search for, then press the [w-

srch] key.

This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.

If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error

indication appears.

@ Address specification bv address inout

Enter the address of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the (w-

srch] key.

This operation searches the program for relay coils with the specified address from the

current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

l-42



5. OPERATION

When a relay coil with the specified address is found, the section of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil.

If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error

indication appears.

(e) [n-srch] (net-number search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of

the screen. If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number, the display is

advanced by one net.

(f)

[s-srch

]

(function-instruction search)

This key searches for function instructions. Searching is performed by entering a function

instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch] key. If the [s-srch] key is pressed

while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as

that function instruction are searched for.

(g) Search operation using the cursor keys

(< c >, -z + >)

Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. The address is searched for.

Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. The NET No. is searched for.

Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number,

then press a cursor key. The function instruction is searched for.

Example: Enter Sl, then press a cursor key.

The function instruction END1 is

searched for,

(h) Searching in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)

When the source program type is

“FORMAT-B/C”, global searching in all main/sub-

programs is enabled.

Refer to “APPENDIX 6 Managing a Source Program” for source program type.

1) The range of search

All programs, which include a currently displayed subprogram, are searched for.

The subprogram is searched for in the ascending order of P address.

a) From the current cursor position to bottom of currently opening subprogram.

b) From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.

c) From LEVEL1 to subprogram of which P address is small next to a).

d) From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

l-43



5. OPERATION

G-SRCH mode continues unless pushing the < ESC > key or the [cancel] key.

__1.

A

1st net of LEVEL1

8

I@

@

@

m t cursor

t displaying on

one of

the screen

Whole

@

1

subprograms

program

0

@

Th

Final net of the maximum numbered subprogram

v

(Searching in the order of @ -@I)

a

Searching result

When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position.

In case of finding in another program the program which is currently displayed will be

closed.

Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object

position with the cursor.

At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are

modifications in the program to be closed.

When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed in order of 1) one

by one.

l-44



5. OPERATION

3) Operation

The global search is operated with the following function key.

0

8 [comand]

(comand]

J

@ Select the [G-srch] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 8

[G-SRCH] 1

(Shortcut command is ” <G > +

[COMMAND]“)

a)

Beginning of “G-SRCH” mode

It switches to the mode of “G-SRCH” by the operation of 0 + 9.

After that, all programs are searched unless quitting “G-SRCH” mode.

b)

Execution of search

Refer to “(c) [search]“,“‘(d) [w-srchj”Y(e) [s-srch]” in “(7)Searching in a sequence

program”, for how to specify the target of global search.

c)

End of “G-SRCH” mode

“G-SRCH” mode is ended by pushing < ESC > or [CANCEL] key. The end method is

different individually.

- <ESC> = Only “G-SRCH” mode is ended. The program on the opening now

is the state as it is.

- [CANCEL] = It returns to the program which was opened at beginning the “G-

SRCH” mode. The program on the opening now closes.

Whether will save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are

modifications in the program which IS currently displayed.

Copying sections of

a

sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be copied net by net. Specify the net to be copied. The

net can be copied in the same file that IS being edited or Into another file. The selected net

remains as it was.

l - 45



5. OPERATiON

File which is beinq edited

[COPY

1

Range to be copied

[until]

Fig. 51.2 (6)

Specified file

[COPY]

I

.,:/..:...\:::..:...;....,’ :,

.‘.Z’_’ ,” . ..‘).’ .:.:.::,:.:.‘.:.‘:.:.:,:.;,, ..:.:.:...:.:.:.::.‘...:.:.:.:.L:.,.

:.:.:.:.:.:.:,‘.‘:y(.:.~.:::

:.:.:i’i .:,:,y .

:.>;.x ,:.y

.‘.....‘.:.:Q:.:.:~:.:.~.:.: 1:.

$$

::;$$,j:$;~:

++t :I;,

$ S;+b ;; ;:&J&&,l ~~i~~~~~~,~~~:~~pI~~, j@$j$$

:: ::..:.:- ,. .:::::::::

$+.:. .:.:.:.:i.::,.:::::::: .,:.:..::::: .~:::.:.:.~.:::.:.;::..‘_,._. .:

I

[Operation]

Copying a net

Place the cursor on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net is

displayed in yellow.

Copying two or more nets

To select the nets to be copied, first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be

copied, then move the cursor to the net at the other end of the range to be copied by

pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], [c-down], or [search] key. The selected nets

are displayed in yellow.

Alternatively, enter a numeric value and press the [c-up] or [c-down] key. The cursor

moves according to the specified value.

Setting the net or nets to be copied

Press the [until] key.

Specifying the copy destination using the

file)

[to] key (Copying the net or nets in the same

Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the (to] key. The

l-46



c3

-

*

@

5. OPERATION

selected net or nets are copied immediatelv above the CODY destination specified by the

cursor.

To copy the selected net or nets two or more times, enter the number

of times

they are to be copied before pressing the [to] key.

Specifying the copy destination using the [to-fill key (Copying the net or nets into another

file)

1)

2)

3)

4)

Press the [to-fit] key. The following message is displayed.

If no program is specified, LATMP is created.

c,

i:~l::::::~~:l::t’:l:::ill:~:~~:~:~:~:~.’ . :.:

.‘:::::::::,:,,:. .:. .$,,

ix::::

,.,.

~:~~.:.:.:.:.:c.:.:.:.::~~~~:~:~:~:~~~::ii:

: ::;.:~

‘;:?:(“.‘.”

::

:

. .:...:...:.:.:.)):::.:~l:~‘.~:..:‘.~.‘:,,,...,:.

: : :,: .y :

. ... .

.

(LATMP file: Provisional work file used in editing)

Enter the-name of the file into which the net(s) is to be copied and press the

<RETURN > key.

Select desired processing from the following POP-UP menu:

/I

If the selected destination file is present, the following POP-UP menu is displayed.

Select desired processing from the menu.

The file already exists.

~1

Update

F2 Quit

F Append

Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the

previous data of the file.

Cancels output to the selected file.

Appends the copy to the selected file.

If the nets to be copied are known beforehand, place the cursor on the first net to be

copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, then press the [Copy] key. Steps @, ai,

and @ can be skipped.

(Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

(9) Moving sections of a sequence program

A multiple-net sequence program can be moved net by net. Specify the net or nets to be

copied. The selected net or nets can be moved to another place in the same file that is being

edited or output to another file. The selected net or nets are deleted.

The only difference between copying and moving is that the selected net or nets are deleted in

moving.

-tIWlet Delnet Insert Adress

Search

WY

Move File syEdit

[Move]

until

cancel search

c-down c-up

to

cancel search

c-down

C-UP

to-fil

+org

l-47



5. OPERATION

[Operation]

Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to $3 for copying.

(Note)

incorrect nets cannot be moved.

(10) Combining a sequence program

A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited.

The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to

the original source program that is being edited.

[}-9

Section to be edited

Original screen

File being edited

(original file)

t

View screen

r

I

F-01

Combine

1

dit

Edited file to be

combined

Fig. 51.2 (7) Combining a Sequence Program

The model specified for the FAPT LADDER system must agree with the PMC model of the file

to be entered on the original screen.

However, the file to be combined can be specified for

(TO) or entered for (VIEW) even if the two models do not agree with each other. (If a

disagreement is found, a warning message is displayed.)

In this case, no errors will be detected even if the file to be combined contains an address

range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified model. (The error

will be detected in compilation.)

When ignoring the warning message to continue the

operation, extreme care is needed.

l-48



5. OPERATION

1) Function keys

[Comand ]

” ::. ” :.

..‘.. .

: .

&

. .

inmet

~ BPiiiei:’ I_lnreti. : :“Adiers

Se&&. j r &,fjjf ;:;:: ;,.:&qove..

syEdii

ORIGINAL = display when the file is opened for the first time

View

= display when the file is opened using the [File] command

PMC Model on which editing is carried out on the View 1 screen

- ORCSAL = Intia dspa) at openng the file

=Dspay opened by [Fle comand

-- Mode o PMC edted in Vew screen

EDT .~LAN Eii: VlCW

A YFLADDERFTEST :LA PYCfiC3

; x0000

+;

+ SiB71 I PO@@

ISP I

Kmmm

NET 0000100002 STE

YOOO 0

”

sY=AwE 00026552 1

I

Fig. 51.2 (8)

Screen Displayed

when a

File is Opened

by the (File] Command

l - 49



5. OPERATION

2)

Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program

Specify an insertion point (The

data is inserted immediately

above the cursor.)

I

[ Press thl:LE] key 1

) Specify ; view file 1

c POP-UP menu >

4 (View)

+ (To)

Combines the file with

the Ladder program on

the original screen

Shows the ladder

diagram of the file to be

combined (View screen)

1.

2.

Check the displayed

data of the file to be

combined

Edit the data of the

file to be combined

and combine it

Edit the Ladder program

on the view screen

(Normal editing)

I

ress the c ESC > key to terminate editing

1. The file is

immediately

combined.

The

data of the file is

not displayed.

< POP-UP menu s

+

(Save)

Saves the Ladder

program shown on the

view screen

$ (Edit)

Returns to the ladder

diagram screen (The

view screen is

continued.)

* 1: The name of the provisional work file is LATMP.

Fig. 51.2 (9) Operation Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

1 - 50



5. OPERATION

3) Examples

Example 1. Combining a sequence program file

[Operation]

Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN > key.

From the following menu, select Fl (To).

The file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original

screen)

Example 2. Combining a modified sequence program

[Operation]


Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combining and press the <RETURN > key.

From the following menu, select F2 (View).

Edit the Ladder program on the view screen.

To terminate editing, press the

<ESC> key.

(Ladder editing can be performed and terminated in the

conventional way.)

l-51



5. OPERATION

@I From the following menu, select Fl (Save).

Temp (Outputs the data to the LATMPm file.)

8 Return to the screen of step-@‘and check -the name of the file output in step @.

Then, select Fl (To).

Y

.- @I -The-file is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0.

(Original

screen)

Example 3. Combining a specified section of a sequence program

[Operation]


Select [File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN> key.

From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).

Select [Copy] or [Move] on the view screen and specify a desired range with

(until].

From the following function menu, select [to-org]. (Specify insertion into the

original screen.)

[until]

to

cancel search c-down c-up

to-fil to-org

From the following menu, select Fl (Exec).

jj

The data is inserted immediately above the net specified in step 0. (Original

screen)

1-52



5. OPERATION

(11) Editing a symbol and comment from the ladder diagram editing screen

On the ladder diagram editing screen, a symbol and comment added at the specified address

can be edited.

[Comand]

[syEdit]

1

I

:,Y;~y~r”::~:~ .:

~~:;~::;:‘::::.,:,:j ::

:ig:::iexee+::

..I. .?. .A. . .

. .

,.,., .,.,. ,:

aiijans~l, j3

: . . . .

I

[Operation]

Specifying an address

To edit a symbol and comment in a ladder diagram, place the cursor on the corresponding

address and press the (syEdit] key.

Editing the symbol and comment

The cursor moves to the symbol editing section in the bottom right part of the screen. Edit

the symbol and press the <RETURN > key. The cursor moves to the comment field.

Terminating editing

(exec] key

: Terminates editing after modifying the data.

[cancel] key :

Terminates editing without modifying the data.

(12) Abbreviated input with the [cornand] key

Each function key can be directly selected with the [comand] key. Enter one of the character

strings below, then press the [comand] function key.

Those portions that are enclosed in

brackets can be omitted.

I (nsert) D (elnet)

SY)E NW

S (earth)

c (OPY)

M (ove)

F (ile)

The function keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.

(Note)

The keys [ k or L ] and [J orJ ] are used to create or delete a vertical line

extending upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. The solid vertical

line is for creation and the dashed vertical line IS for deletion. The menu item applying

to a function key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.

l-53



5. OPERATION

(13) ZOOM

When the source program type is “FORMAT-B”, it is realized with easy operation to refer and

edit another subprogram, which is called by the CALU CALLU instruction from the program

now on the opening.

For the source program type, refer to “APPENDIX 6 Management a source program”.

1)

2)

3)

Start up of zoom

a)

Moved the cursor to the parameter of the CALUCALLU instruction and push the

<RET> key.

b) The program now on opening hides from the editing screen. Then the subprogram

which is specified by the parameter in mentioning above appears on the screen.

Start up under editing

When ZOOM is attempted while editing the program, the preservation of modifications will

be inquired. Select either.

End

of ZOOM

Close the current program.

I

I

l Save 8 zoom

F2 Cancel

I

When the end operation with the =zESC > key is attempted in the program editing screen

by ZOOM, it will return to the state when ZOOM is started. Moreover, it is possible to

return to the program configuration screen all at once.

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

Fl Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Renamesave & quit

F4 Edit

F5 Main

a) Fl:Save(update) & quit

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content of current

program screen is preserved.

b) F2:Quit


program screen is cancelled.

l-54



5. OPERATION

c) F3:Rename, save & quit


program screen is preserved into specified subprogram name.

(14) List of subprograms in use

The list of subprograms called from currently displayed program is displayed.

For the function. refer to the., “chapter 12. Creating a st ep sequence (14) Li st"of "FAPT

LADDER (personal computer) supplementary operator’s manual B-66131/04-6”.

Only the operation is described here.

1) Operation

The command “List” is operated with the following function key.

0

[comand]

1

8 [comand]

............................................

......

,.,:.:.........

.......

: ..........

..:. I :,,,:y::‘.Ii:‘:

;.,,:<;;;:<.y

........... ....x,?

......... ........

.y,:+:)(,.,:.:. j. : : : ::IQi

1 $$$i&$;;$ 2 :‘~,~i5t~ 3 $$$&$:$j;j4 ‘.$&&&r$r_ij ;;&&&;i 6 $$;$$.tt$$

7 ~&~~~ 8 ~~>:,.$&$;~~$$;&gijllia@:ii o:~~:~~:.:~:~~~,d~~

...... : .:.

.....

..... ............... ... .. ..........

......

: ...... :

..........

.....

@ Select the [List] with pushing the [SHIFT] (the following will be displayed) in state of 8

I

. :. :.....;,. :,.:,./.

A.. . . . . . .I . . . . : .::,::.:.. . .

,.. . .

.,y,.:. :.:::,.

:

fZy... .. :.:.;:.:. :..,.

: ,....:.:.:.:..

’I’I:I:I:i:i’:

_‘,‘...‘........‘.,.~.~i.,~~, :...,.,.. . .:.,.:

1 : :::~::.~$~:,.,~~~~

i~~~~~~~~~i:aiiQqiiaiiiij:iii~~~~~~

:il~,id,iri;i3:,~:~ $$,e) $::i; 6 ‘:i:iil.::‘~;:i~~~~~~jxiiil~;~~~~: 8

~~~i~~~~riiiilli

~~;i::~iis::::iiiiOr;.;$, ift j,: ::l)j

..: :::,., ~,

,( :.>y.

.,

. : .: :. . :

. .\ . .:.::;

.L... )‘.

. . . . .

.::,:.:::.y::/~ :. :,:,: :::j

..I

(Shortcut command is ” < L > + [COMMAND]“)

(15) To edit Net comment

It is able to write the comments between ladder nets.

These comments are called “Net

comment”,

and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

1)

To enter Net comment

a)

Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net comment.

And then press ” <Shift > + [netcmt]“.

R1OO1. O R1000.2

Y2000. 4

n

R1OO1. O

R1000. 2

Y23. 4

+*I

A

l-55



5. OPERATION

b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,

and the area for comment enclosed by

‘(” and “)’ is inserted.

Then the cursor changes into character-size cursor, and type comment sentence onto

the area.

The area for Net comment expands and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines

display mode) automatically according to the comment sentences. Every Net comment

can expands up to a hundred lines.

R1OO1.O R1000.2

=Li”

R120.3

Y2000.4

n

”

character cursor

(’ Net comment is written in here.

4 9

(* All characters you can enter are available.

‘)

R1OO1.O R1000.2 Y23.4

+H-

2) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment

a) To determine the editing Net comment, press [ end ] or < ESC>. Then the editing

comment is fixed, and the Net comment editing mode is finished.

b) To cancel the editing Net comment, press [cancel]. The new Net comment will be

cancelled and erased.

Note) The number of characters in a Net comment is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one

ASCII character as one byte, one Japanese kana as one byte, one kanji character

as two bytes.

‘Line feed’ is also available on Net comment. Line feed is helpful to save memory

for Net comment.

3) To modify Net comment

a)

Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press

” <Shift > + [netcmt]” or < RET > . The Net comment editing mode becomes active,

and the Net comment will be ready to modify its contents.

b)

At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into Net comment, press [inslin].


(’ All characters you can enter are available. I:::

‘)

3

1-56



5. OPERATION

c)

At Net comment editing mode,

to delete by line, press [dellin].

(’ Net comment is written in

here.

3

:.:.:.:

(* Net comment will expand or shrink automatically. .iz

(’ All characters you can enter are available.

(*

[dellin) will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one

line.

d)


‘)

(’ &I characters you can enter are available.

‘)

To exit from Net comment editing mode, press [ end ] or < ESC >.

e)

To cancel the modifications you have just made, press [cancel]. [cancel] will abandon

the modifications and the Net comment will be restored as it was before the

modifications.

[inslin] will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line, and make a blank line

at the cursor position.


.

(’ y:

:. .

(’ All characters you can enter are available.

l

‘)

‘)

(’

l

3

3

3

4) To delete Net comment

There are two ways to delete Net comment.

- Use [Delnet] as same as deleting normal ladder nets.

“[command] + [Delnet] --) specify area to delete -+ [exec]”

- Entering Net comment editing mode by ” c Shift > + [netcmt]” or <RET > with the

cursor on the Net comment which you want to delete, and then press [delete].

5) Lost Net comment

A Net comment consists of the information of position in sequence program which is called

“Net comment pointer”,

and “Net comment string data” which is comment sentences

themselves.

These two elements are usually combined one to one to make a Net

comment, but the partner might be lost by illegal file operations or something, such as

copying the ladder file

“‘.#LA” or modifying the Net comment data file “NETCMT.OOO” by

user. When a Net comment pointer loses its Net comment string data, the Net comment is

called “Lost Net comment”.

Lost Net comment is displayed as blank Net comment enclosed by ‘I(“’ and “‘)” which is

displayed in purple or dimly on monochrome display. Lost Net comment can be

1 - 57



5. OPERATION

normalized by editing operation. Lost Net comment can be edited as a normal Net

comment, such as deletion, copying and so on.

(16) To edit New page

It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram. This specification of

the position is called “New page”,

and each of them occupies two steps in sequence program.

1)

2)

To enter New page

a) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press ” -z Shift > +

I paw I”.

R1OO1.O R1000.2

Y2000.4

xl-+’

A

”

R120.3

R1OO1.O R1000.2

Y23.4

+Hf

A

w

b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R1000.2

Y2000.4

x-+

n

v

R120.3

<New page>

R1OO1.O R1000.2

Y23.4

+HI

n

Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. The operations such as

copying [ Copy 1, moving [ Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] ladder nets are also effective on

New page.

(17) Terminating editing of a sequence program

[Operation ]

@ Press the (ESC > key on the following editing screen.

l-58



5. OPERATION

The following editing end menu(pop-up menu) appears.

a)

W

d)

e)

1Fl Save(update) & quit

F2 Quit

F3 Renamesave & quit

F4 Edit

F5 Main

1 Save(update) 81quit

After current content of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended.

F2:Quit

After current content of the editing is cancelled, the editing screen will be ended.

F3:Renamesave & quit

After current content of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the

editing screen will be ended.

F4:Edit

The c ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

F5:Main

With the operation “a)“.“b)” or “c)“,

it returns to the program screen where ZOOM

was started. But with this operation, it returns to a program configuration screen at all

once from the nested state.

Either the above-mentioned is selected and it returns to the program configuration screen,

the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.

When error net exists

When the error net exists, ”

ERROR NET NO.” is displayed and the

end menu is not

displayed. Cope this case by the following.

a) After the error net is corrected or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end

operation will be done.

b) When pressed <ESC> key in the state of 0 after “CAN” is typed (meaning of

CANCEL), the menu of 6, will be displayed.

-

When Save is ordered, it will be preserved after removing the error net.

-

When Quit is ordered, it will be able to return to the state before editing by

cancelling the content of the editing.

l - 59



5. OPERATION

5.1.3 Symbol and comment editing

The definition of terms

Terms

Symbol

(Extended)

definition and uses

Name assigned uniquely to each relay/

coil, to be used in place of PMC address

display

x0.0

INPUT

++++I--

Relay comment

(New)

Coil comment

(Extended and

Renamed, old

name: Comment)

Text assigned to relays/coils to explain

them.

Text assigned to coils to explain them.

;w

COMMEiT CO&NT

YO.0

--I

HERE IS

COIL

COMMENT

Net comment

Text assigned between ladder nets to

explain them.

$n_

t-

COMMENT

‘1

Tables for Symbol & Comment specifications

In FAPT LADDER, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, and can add

notes to a sequence program.

Symbol/Comment for l/O signals and internal relays

1)

Ver. 8.1 or earlier

I

Data kind

Available

characters

I

aximum

number

Duplicated

definition

t-

Display on

CRT’ MDI

Symbol

ASCII characters

(lowercase alphabetic

characters not allowed)

Not supported

6 bytes

Not supported

6552 entries

Not allowed

Yes

Relay comment 1

Comment

ASCII characters

Japanese kanal

kanji characters

(Note 1)

30 bytes

Not supported

I

64 kbytes - 1 byte

(65535 bytes)

l-60



5. OPERATION

2) Ver. 8.4 or later

Data kind

Available

characters

Maximum

character

Symbol

ASCII characters

(lowercase

alphabetic

characters not

allowed)

16 bytes

Relay comment

Comment

ASCII characters ASCII characters Japanese

Japanese kanal

kana/

kanji characters

kanji characters

(Note 2)

(Note 1)

16 bytes

30 bytes

Maximum

number

Duplicated

definition

20,000 entries

20,000 entries 20, 000 entries

(Note 3)

(Note 3)

(Note 3)

Not allowed Allowed

Allowed

Display on

CRT/MD1

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or No

Yes, if the symbol assigned

shorter. to the same address is 6

(Note 4) bytes or shorter.

(Note 4)

Note 1) CRTiMDl can not display Japanese characters, replaced to blank.

(Japanese characters can be handled with only PC98 series)

Note 2)

Japanese characters in relay comment are replaced to blank when printing.

Note 3) Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may restrict

them.

Note 4) When the total size of all coil comments exceeds 64 kbytes, no symbols and

comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.

Comment for ladder sequence program

* Ver.8.4 or later

I

Data kind Net comment

Available characters

ASCII characters

Japanese kana/kanji characters

Line feed

(Note 1)

Steps to occupy

I

2 steps/Net comment

Maximum charactersiline

Maximum lines

Maximum number

64 charactersiline

4095 characters/Net comment

(Note2)

100 lines/Net comment (Note2)

About 20,000 Net comments

(Note3)

Display on CRT/MD1

No

Note 1) Japanese characters are replaced to blank when printing.

Note 2)

The limitation which is reached first becomes the limitation for the Net comment.

Note 3)

Number of characters in each Net comment effects on maximum number of Net

comments. Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer may

further restrict them.

l-61



5. OPERATION

Before using extended symbol comment

Note the followings in case of using extended symbofcomment.

1)

2)

These functions are available to the undermentioned PMC setting.

- PMC-RB4 RB4( STEP)

- PMCRC4/RC4(STEP)

- PMC-RBSiRB6

- PMC-NB2

Source programs for above-mentioned PMC, created with ver.8.1 or earlier,

need

conversion.

The operation is the followings.

a)

Prepare source programs and start the ver.8.4.

b)

Adapt PMC setting to a source program.

cl

Convert it into ALL-format mnemonic data.

4

Reconvert the mnemonic data into a source program with another program name.

The conversion is completed by above-mentioned procedure.

3)

There is no operation in case of creating new source program.

Moving the cursor

< +- >, < + 7, <t 7, < 5_ 7

Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.

<Shift> + <c>,<+>

Moves the cursor to another position within the field to

be edited.

Entering a comment in Japanese

When a front-end processor for Japanese word input is used, a comment can be entered in

Japanese. When a comment containing kana characters or m-type alphanumeric characters is

compiled (a ROM-format file is created), all the kana characters and m-type alphanumeric

characters are replaced with spaces.

To sstart the front-end processor for Japanese word input, press

< CTRL > and < XFER

7

the keys.

For the operation of the front-end processor for Japanese word input, see the corresponding

manual.

To exit from the front-end processor for Japanese word Input. press the

‘<I keys.

< CTRL

7

and

1-62



5. OPERATION

(1) Start

[Operation]

@ Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

8 The following symbol and comment editing screen appears:

3l

~UDKESS

_.~

0001 XUOOO 0

lm2 x0000 1

IJUO3 )ilJOUJ. 2

UllO‘l 5oouu3

I

I

SFWL

COWEST

SY-:.

CUWEST I?ZPUT SLWLE So 1

WB

CLMEXT INPUT WCLE ho 1

W-C

COWXT lXCT SLWLE Xo 1

mi

CUWST ICPUT SUWLE hc. 1

111t ; MD I ( F4 or SBFT - F1 ) key hhen you add Address data

1

1s~

I SllA 4 < -> key wen YOU mve cursor by a character.

ZSEARCR 3 MEA 4 f&B 5

GDELETE 7,‘.

8CUPY SPASTE 10 EB

(2) Entering a new symbol and comment

A new symbol and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is

assigned.

[Operation]

Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

An input window opens on the screen.

1

[

1

I

t t

Address field Symbol field

t

Comment field

Enter an address in the address field.

The symbol field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a symbol.

The comment field is shown in reverse video.

Enter a comment.

1-63



5. OPERATION

@ The entered address, symbol, and comment are cleared from the window and entered into

-

the file.

When no symbols and comments are entered, the system is automatically set to receive new

data.

(3) Editing a symbol and comment

A symbol and comment assigned to an address can be edited.

-_ .-

-

[Operation]. - I

(4)

Moving a comment

@ If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] to exit from that state.

8 Move the cursor by pressing the < c >,

<+>, < T >, or c 1 > key and edit the data.

To move the cursor within a field, while pressing the e Shift > key press the < cz- or e -+>

key.

A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation]

Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

Select [DELETE].

The following message appears on the screen.

1Comment data copied to paste buffer 1

Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be moved.

Select [PASTE).

(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

2 Select [COPY].

0 The following message appears on the screen.

l-64



5. OPERATION

1Comment data copied to paste buffer 1

@ Place the cursor at the place the comment is to be copied.

8 Select [PASTE].

(6)

Searching for a symbol or address

[Operation]

@ Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

8 The following input window appears on the screen.

SEARCH :

0 Enter the symbol or address to be searched for and the data number.

@ The system searches for the symbol or address and the data number in that order. The

cursor is moved to the searched data.

(7) Deleting a symbol and/or comment

(a)

Deleting

both a

symbol and a comment

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the NO field.

C3 Select [DELETE]. Both the symbol and the comment are deleted.

(b) Deleting either

a symbol or a comment

[Operation]

0

Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.

8 Select [DELETE]. Only the selected symbol or comment is deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments simultaneously

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.

(2 Select [AREA].

The entire line is displayed in reverse video, and the following

message appears on the screen.

Running Appoint extent

1-65



5. OPERATION

Q Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.

@ Select [DELETE]. All the data displayed in reverse video is deleted.

(8) Terminating the symbol and comment editing

[Operation]

0 On the edit screen, select [END] or press the <ESC> key.

8 The following message appears on the screen:

1 i

Update (Saves the edited data.)

1 Edit (Returns to editing.)

Qutt (Cancels the edited data.)

0 Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.

(9) Editing screen (the case of model setting is PMC-RBWRB4

(STEP)/RCWRC4 (STEP))

*Symbol entry number

I+

Coil comment size

(byte)

CRT/MD1 can display / Total

I

CRT/MD1 can display / Total

I

EDIT ( SYMBOL 6 COMMENT )

I

PMC-RB4

<O>[A:%FLvDATA%RB4

1

SYYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090

NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT y (Notel)

IV

I

I I

I

00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA

00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB

00003*X00000.2 CCCCC

cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc

1

'*' means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

Note 1)

‘T’ is the indicator. Symbol/comment are displayed with turning at this point in ladder

diagram editing screen.

(10)

Searching by a part of strings

Search function is active for specified field, LINE NO.IADDRESSiSYMBOLGELAY or COIL

COMMENT.

Especially you can find relay coil comment, which is too long, by specifing a part of data

strings.

l-66



5. OPERATION

1)

Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search.

Furthermore, the display of function-key changes as the undermentioned.

, .:;: &.<]:;

. .;,::.,;_....

:.

- . . . . . . . . . . . . .;....

.,. .

:\\y .:. : . .

.,.,.,.

2 ,: .ADRs ..; 3 .SYMB$4 ;: [email protected]. 5 ;:

.:C,o’

.+.. ::... .,.,. .,\ .,

.,: 6 I’ .:,, ::;j::i:: jj)j:: pj.:i”““::: ,

_I... ..... . . . .

‘. ‘::.:.:.

. .

:..

9 ::y .:y .:.:.:< , o . ..; :,

..: : .,

. . : ,. ,,.

8 :“.

:. ,. : .‘:;::..{:...

... ,,

I

2)

Input strings and specify the data kind for searching by function-key.

A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3)

If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.

l-67



5. OPERATION

5.1.4 Message editing

An arbitrary message can be displayed on the CRT MDI screen of the CNC, using the DISPB

instruction (SUB

41) ,

which is one of the function instructions.

Such a message is created as

described below.

5.1.4.1

Types and quantity of characters that can be used

The types of characters usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model to another, as

listed below.

I

I

Characters that can be entered

CNC/PMC

JIS levels 1 Full-size Half-size Alphanumeric

and 2

hiragana

katakana

characters

F16

PMC-RB/RB2/RB3/RB4 RB5/

A

RBG.‘RCIRC3IRC4

0

0 0

F18 PMC-RAl IRA2’RA3

A 0

0 0

F15B PMC-N:NA/NB

X X

0 0

ra’,“’

PMC-PAlIPA3

X X

0 0

(A : Some characters cannot be displayed. They cannot be checked by FAPT LADDER.)

The half-size kana and alphanumeric characters can be entered using the kana and alphanumeric

keys on the keyboard.

Similarly to symbols and comments, Japanese-language text can be edited

using the Japanese-language input FEP (front-end processor). The number of characters is limited

as follows:

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used

:

62 characters

2) When only half-size kana characters are used

: 127 characters

3) When only alphanumeric characters are used

: 256 characters

5.1.4.2 Edit procedure

The edit method that can be used varies between the CNCIPMC model in which Japanese

language (excluding half-size characters) can be used and other models. This section describes

the procedure common to all models (only alphanumeric characters are entered), using the PMC-

RC as an example.

(1) Startup

[Operation]

$9 Select [MESSAG] (message) from the edit menu

l-68



5. OPERATION

@ The following message data edit screen appears. (Fig. 51. 4)

1 002 ,401:.

003 .AOO2

; 004 ,400 ,’

Fig. 51.4 Message Data Edit

Screen

(2) input

[Operation]

0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

C~J Key in the desired message data.

(3) Modification

[Operation]

@ Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

Q The character cursor moves on to the message and blinks there.

a Place the cursor at the location where modification is required. using the cursor keys.

@ Key in the desired characters to modify the message data.

@ Press the <RETURN> key.

(4)

Search [TOP] [BOTTOM]

[Operation]

0 On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

QJ The cursor moves to the start or end message address.

1-69



5. OPERATION

(5) END

(Operation]

@ On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC > .

8 The following message appears.

8 Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.

5.1.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described below.

(1) Startup

[Operation]

0 Select [MODULE] (I’0 module) from the edit menu.

8 The following Ii0 module edit screen appears. (Fig. 5.15)

ADDRESSCROI ' PASE SLOT

WAVE ADDRESSCROUPBASE SLOT WE

X0000

SOOOl i i i t

I D16C soooo

I D16C ~0001

X000?

YOOOZ

: x0003

PO003

s0004

\ 0004

X0005

YOOO5

, X0006

YOOO6

x0007

YOOOi

\ OOOE

YOOOB

X0009

YOOOD

x0010 YOOI O

so011

YOOI I

X001? YOOI ?

\ 0013

10013

so014 \ 0011

SO015

10015

l i EAXCHI hpt"l HELP 1

5

606LETE7DELAi . L

5,

10 END

Fig. 51.5 (a) I’0 Module Edit Screen

l-70



5. OPERATION

x0000 0

' WOO

0

\ooc2

\0003 ;

\000

yoo~ 0

%’

sooo~

coo10

~0011

\OO ?

xooi3

\OOl?

.\OOlI

i 000

::: \ooooOOQl

:: 1:f 10002003

YOOO4

0 01

:I F0005

FOO06

YOOCi

YOOOS

10009

YOOlO

10011

YOOl?

YOO13

YOOi4

YOOl5

1WKH ?IXPoT 3’BELP 4PKCB 5 4XLUl GDELETEDEL%L8DK’C-i 9.

I O’mB,

Fig. 51.5 (b) Ii0 Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one channel can be set)

(2) Channel switching

(only for models in which more than one channel can be set)

(i) To switch to the next channel:

[Operation]

0 Select (NXT.CH].

(ii) To switch to the previous channel:

[Operation]

ci Select [PRV.CH].

(3) Setting

[Operation]

Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

Key in the module address in the following format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1) The module name that can be specified may vary depending on the model of the PMC

or I’0 unit. Selecting [HELP] or pressing the <HELP> key can display the module

names that can be displayed in the NAME field.

(Note 2) The I,0 unit MODEL-B is allocated as follows:

“GROUP” : Specify a group number in the configuration.

“BASE” : Must be fixed at ‘0’.

“SLOT” : Specify the unit number of the PO Unit-B. Alternatively. set to ‘0’ if

power ONjOFF information ‘##’ is to be allocated.

l-71



5. OPERATION

(4) Deletion [DELETE] [DELALL) [DEL.CH]

(i) To delete one module:

‘[Operation J

@ Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted.

0 Select [DELETE].

(ii) To delete all modules:

[Operation] ” +

0 Select [ DELALL].

(iii) To delete the modules of one channel (for models in which more than one channel can be

set):

[Operation 1

@ Select a channel for deletion.

8 Select (DEL.CH].

(5) Search [SEARCH]

[Operation]

@ Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.

8 Place the cursor at the specified address.

(6) END [END]

[Operation]

On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

The following message appears.

/I

Select one of the above items. and return to the edit menu.

l-72



5. OPERATION

(7) Termination [END]

[Operation]

0 Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.

@ The following message appears.

Fl

Update

F2

Quit

F-3

Edit

@ Press the desired function key. The system returns to the editing screen.

5.1.6 System parameter editing

(1) Start

[Operation]

0 Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing menu.

G3 The system parameter editing screen appears.

The screen shown below is the system parameter editing screen for PMC-FIB. For each

PMC model, see item (4) below.

(2) Input

[Operation]

(J,) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 7 and < 1 > keys

Q Enter data

For information about Input items, see Item

(4)

below

1-73



5. OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation]

(4)

0 Select [END] or press < ESC > on the editing screen.

@ The following message appears:

II

@ Select a function key from the above. The screen display returns to the editing menu.

System parameter editing

screen and input items for each PMC model

(a)

PMC-L/M

[Editing screen]

0 PMC-L

j ) BCD ?- DI GI TAREA

OBYTE

F' K YPE =L

R-AREA 0

(

S:i,%;O:

81 11

s

0 Xo

0 400

l-74





5. OPERATION

3 TIMER USED AREA (area used for timers1

When timers are set with the TMR function instruction on the CRT/MDI, setting and

display in BCD is possible.

This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area that can be set and displayed in

decimal format. This area is allocated from the start (D300) of nonvolatile memory.

This area must be specified in the TMR instruction parameter of timer control data

address to enable decimal display.

A timer control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be set

as follows:

@ COUNTER USED AREA (area used for counters)

When the preset values of counters are set with the CTR function instruction on the

CRT/MDI, setting and display in BCD is possible.

This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area to use for decimal setting and

display. This area is allocated after the TIMER USED AREA in nonvolatile memory.

This area must be specified in the CTR instruction parameter of counter control data

address to allow decimal display.

A counter control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be

set as follows:

(Number of counters for decimal display) x 5 bytes

@ BCD 4-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq/disolav in four-diait BCD)

This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses that can

be set and displayed on the screen (CRTIMDI) in 4-digit BCD. This area is allocated

after the COUNTER USED AREA in nonvolatile memory.

Two bytes are required for four-digit BCD display.

Therefore, this parameter must be

set as follows:

(Number of addresses for 4-digit BCD display) x 2 bytes

@ BCD 2-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq and disolavinq in two-diait BCDl

This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses that can

be set and displayed on the screen (CRTIMDI) in two-digit BCD. This area is allocated

after the BCD 4-DIGIT AREA in nonvolatile memory.

One byte is required for two-digit BCD display. Therefore, this parameter must be set

as follows:

l-76



5. OPERATION

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter sets an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder

levels.

This setting reduces ladder scan time, thus achieving high-speed ladder

execution.

Note, however, that increased ladder execution time on the first and second levels

reduces ladder processing time on the third level.

Initial value 100

Setting range 100 to 200

CYCLE TIME

This parameter specifies a sequence program execution period of 16 or 8 ms.

Initial value 0 : 16 ms

Setting 0: 16ms/l :8ms

Note, however, that this parameter cannot be set with PMC-L and PMC-M (MMC);

PMC-L is always set to 16 ms, and PMC-M (MMC) is always set to 8 ms.

IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division method)

This parameter specifies whether to use the ladder division method or non-division

method.

Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not

executed.

I

nitial value 0 : Division method

(b) PMC-P

[Editing screen]

Setting 0 : NO (division method)

1 : YES (non-division method)

I

l-77



5. OPERATION

[input item]

@I PMC PARAM. SIZE (0 address size]

This parameter specifies the size (in bytes) of nonvolatile memory in the common

nonvolatile memory (0 address) and internal relay (R address) area.

Initial value 2048 Setting range 0 to 2048

In the initial state, no internal relay (R address) can be used. Be sure to specify this

input item when using an internal relay.

(c) PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)/OA

[Editing screen]

@ PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)

P iZ

TYPE =

K

(I/O LI Xx)

@ PMC’QA

I

EDT iSWEl PAtIWMER~

4050 series

( O: BI CARF. l : BCD

10: : ; 100 - 150s

0:

1 0. W 1: YES

PUC TYPE j PA

l-78



5. OPERATION

[Input item]

COUNTER DATA TYPE

This parameter specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR

function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

initial value 0 : BINARY Setting 0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER EXEC (ladder execution time)

This parameter specifies an incremental processing time for the first and second ladder

levels.

This setting reduces ladder scan time,

thus achieving high-speed ladder

execution.

Initial value 100 Setting range 100 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution period of 8

ms.

I

Setting

1

First and second level processing time

100%

1 ~~~~

ms

150% 7.5ms


reduces the following processing times:

PMC screen display time

CPASCAL processing time

Ladder processing time on the third level

PASCAL EXEC (PASCAL execution time)

This parameter specifies the ratio of C/PASCAL execution time to ladder program

execution time.

In contrast to LADDER EXEC, this parameter reduces ladder processing time on the

first and second levels, and increases processing time for PASCAL and similar

processing.

r

nitial value 0

I

Setting range 0 to 100

I

PASCAL EXEC RATIO (ratio of PASCAL processino time to PMC screen processin@

The initial setting gives the same priority to C/PASCAL processing and PMC screen

display. This parameter allocates processing time to the following:


C/PASCAL processing time


Under this setting, PASCAL can run periodically even during PMC screen display.

l - 79



5. OPERATION

r

nitial value 50

1

Setting range to 99

I

When 0% is specified, C/PASCAL is executed after PMC screen display.

Note that if a much greater value is specified in this parameter, the time allocated to

PMC screen display is too short, resulting in a delayed display.

8 PASCAL ORIGIN

This parameter specifies the start address .of the task control block (TCB) of a PASCAL

program.

Initial value Setting range Address in the PASCAL area

I

When there is no PASCAL program, specify OOOOOOH.

@ PASCAL DATA ORIGIN

This parameter specifies the start address (physical address) of the data area for a

PASCAL program.

Initial value 000000

Setting range Address in the PASCAL area

I

When OOOOOOH s set in the PASCAL DATA ORIGIN parameter, %FF4000H (or

sb800000H when an optional RAM is used) is assumed as the address.

@ SYNCHRONIZED LEVEL 3 (third-level svnchronization)

This parameter specifies whether to allow the synchronous buffer to be used in level 3.

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO / 1 : YES

@I PMUOS EDITION fmanaaement software edition)

This parameter specifies the edition of the management software used with PMC-N.

Initial value 01 Setting Edition of the management software currently used

l-80







5. OPERATION

The table below indicates ladder execution time status during an execution period of 8

ms.

Setting First and second level processing time

100%

5ms

150%

7.5ms


reduces the following processing times:


Language program processing time


@ IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division method)

This parameter specifies whether to use the ladder division method or non-division

method.

Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not

executed.

I

nitial value 0 : Division method Setting 0 : NO (division method)

1 : YES (non-division method)

I

@ LANGUAGE EXEC RATIO

As the language program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this

parameter specifies the percentage of the following processing times:


Language program processing time

Processing time of third-level Ladder program

While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed cyclically.

llnitial value 50 1 Setting range 0 to 99

@ LANGUAGE ORIGIN

This parameter specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a

language program.

Initial value 000000

Setting range Address in the language program storage

area

When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.

1-83



5. OPERATION

@ OPERATOR PANEL (connectinq an FO machine operator’s oanel)

This parameter specifies whether a machine operator’s panel is used with the FSO.

When YES is specified in this parameter, specify the Dt’DO addresses where the

operator’s panel is actually connected, an address for key images transferred from the

operator’s panel, and an addresses for LED images transferred to the operator’s panel.

Initial value 0 : NO Setting 0 : NO i 1 : YES

I

0

.-

,,

ii)

iii)

iv)

KEY DI DDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external Dl where the operator’s

panel’ is actually connected.

Setting range X0 to Xl 27,

Xl 000 to Xl 019

KEY DO DDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operator’s

panel is actually connected.

Setting range YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014

KEY BIT IM GE DDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user

programs.

Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user

programs.

Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.

l-84



5. OPERATION

5.2 Printout

A sequence program can be printed out.

When PC9801 is used, PRINT.SYS must be installed

beforehand. Install PRINT.SYS according to Section 2.1 .l.

For printout, FAPT LADDER allows the user to set the top margin, left margin, line spacing and

cross reference. For details on setting, see Section 1.4 of Part II.

Compatible printers

This software is usable with the printers listed below.

NEC PC9801

I

IBM PC/AT

NEC PR201H

EPSON VP1000 (Note)

EPSON VP1000

(Note) To use an Epson VP1 000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification is required. For

details, see Section 1.4 of Part II.

(1) General flow of operation

for printout

-

elect a source program

Make # LS file

[ EXEC]

End -[ EXEC]

<Fl > <Fl>

v

Specify output item

Fig. 5.2 (a) Operation Flow and Screens

l-85





5. OPERATION

The step sequence diagram printing can be selected at PMC-RB4(STEP) 1 RC4(STEP).

1)

2)

:iliiiiliiiiiiiiiiii~~~pR~N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

’ 4

C:FRC4-STEP

TITLE : @#I/YES1

SYSTEMARAMETER

: [ WYESl

SYMBOL COMENT

: WYESI

LADDERIAGRAM

f mT;l;;

: [OPTION]

Added -> ~~...-I

,um

:

[OPTIONI

I/O UODULE

: WYESI

MESSAGE

: [Em/YES1

: [OPTION]

CROSS EFERENCEIST

: [CWYESI

: [OPTION]

BIT ADDRESS AP

: #tU/YESl

Fig. 5.2 (d) Printing menu

C:YRC4-STEP

.fil::l:i

FIO (

ESC 1 :

END

11

Fig. 5.2 (e) Optional setting menu for step sequence diagram printing

PRINT UNIT

Select either only a specified sub-program or all sub-programs.

When selecting “MODULE”, specify the printing sub-program name to “MODULE NAME”.

SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER

Select either not printing / printing sub-program number which belongs to a step sequence

program.

l-87



5. OPERATION

(4) Output item setting

Items to be output to a drawing are specified as described below. More than one item can be

specified at a time. Some set items may not be displayed, depending on the model of the

PMC.

@ Specifying whether to output each data item

Whether to output each data item can be specified by placing the cursor on the desired

item on the output item select menu with the 7 or 1 key, then pressing the <RETURN>

key.

8 Specifying options

For data having optional items, place the cursor on the desired option, then press the

<RETURN > key. The screen for specifying the corresponding option will appear. After

entering the necessary value on that screen, press the < RETURN > key.

6 Detail of each data time

1) Title printing

The data of the title is printed.

2) Parameter printing

The data of the system parameters is printed.

3) Symbol printing

The symbol comment data is printed.

i) Option (symbol printing)

* The output range of symbol comments to be printed is specified. If “0” is

specified as the print end line number, printing continues up to the last line.

4) Ladder diagram printing

A ladder diagram is printed.

i)

Option (ladder diagram printing)

* The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder

diagram to be printed are specified.

* If a diagram is output as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a

module.

* If “0” is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, printing

continues up to the last net.

. If a page break is specified, a page break is made in the ladder diagram at

every new file or subprogram.

* If a cross-reference is specified, the ladder diagram is accompanied with a

cross-reference. (Fig. 5.2 (c))

5) I’0 module printing

The I/O module data is printed.

6) Message printing

The message data is printed.

i) Option (message printing)

* The range of messages to be printed is specified.

l-88



5. OPERATION

. Print format specification

Either Japanese-language (Japanese-language input mode screen) or code

format (code input mode screen) is selected.

7) Cross-reference list printing

A cross-reference list is printed. (Fig. 5.2 (d))

i) Option (cross-reference list printing)

* When a cross-reference list is printed, a check is made for duplicate writing,

and the output range of addresses is specified. If a duplicate write check is

specified, a message is displayed for duplicate writing of a write coil and

duplicate use of a function instruction that uses a number (such as a timer and

counter). The range of output addresses can be specified according to the

following table.

Table 5.2 Cross-Reference List Address Specification

I

I

Address specification mode

Example of

keying in

Address to be output

ALL

ALL

Initial letter of an address

Y

Bit address

R1.O

Byte address

x10

All addresses

All addresses having a specified initial letter

Specified bit addresses only

Specified byte addresses

(including bit addresses)

Address range I

F10.0.F12.7

I

All addresses in a specified range

X2.3.END

(Note 1)

All addresses after a specified address

(Note 1) When an address specification is made, addresses are output in the sequence: X. Y,

F, G, R, A, C, K, D. T, variable address, P. In this example, therefore, Y and all

subsequent addresses are output.

8) List file printing

Data from a list file is printed.

Fig. 5.2(f) Example of Printout of a Ladder Fig. 52(g) Example of Printout with a

Diagram with Cross Reference Data

Multiple coil Write Check Indication

l - 89



5. OPERATION

Example of printout of step sequence diagram

(1) Printout example by “F2[SETUP]” (print menu)

c graphical mode printout >

Initial step

Transition

Label

q 210

PlOl

-h

e Divergence of selective

P150

P160 sequence

+-- Divergence of

I simultaneous

0 S211 0 S215 0 S217 sequence

P151

t t

P161 1 P165

+Convergence of

P152

P162 simultaneous

sequence

0 S212 0 S216

~

Step

P163

P164

f- Convergence of selective

sequence

Block step

Jump

<ASCII mode printout >

.

;* Sl

t

Initial step

: Pl

.

+ PlOO 4

Transition

c-L1

4

Label

s210

: PlOl

c- Divergence of selective

+ P150

+ P160 sequence

+- Divergence of

.

S211 ’ S215 ’

simultaneous

S217 sequence

: P151 : P161

: P165

.

-Convergence of

+ P152 + P162 simultaneous

.

sequence

S212 ’ S216 - Step

: P153

: P163

+ P154 + 164

c- Convergence of selective

F;’ SlOOO 4

sequence

Block step

: P2000

+ P102

->Ll

4

Jump

(2) Printout example by “SUB-PROGRAM NUMBER [NONES]”

<Not print sub program number > <Print sub program number >

&IS1

4-

lOO

c-L1

q 210

jG+G-j-

P160

- Sub program number

P160

l-90





5. OPERATION

(5) Specification of output forms

Specify the paper size and the type of printer forms.

[Operation ]

0 Select [SETUP] on the output item selection screen.

@ The forms selection screen appears (Fig. 5.2(h)).

I

P P\ PERI ZE / LADDERPRI ST

:

10 I NCH

ASCI I

* 10 Pi CH

GRAPHI C

15 I NCH

ASCI I

15 I KCH GRAPHI C

Fig. 5.2(h) Forms Selection Screen

0 Current output form is indicated with *. To change the output format, move the cursor by

< t >orc J >andenter<RETURN>.

@I After selecting forms, select [END) to return to the output item selection screen.

(6) Start of printing

[Operation]

Select [PRINT] on the output item selection screen.

Printing is started: during printing, the indication “PRINTING IN PROGRESS” blinks on the

screen.

When printing ends, the indication

“PRINTING IN PROGRESS” disappears. (To stop

printing halfway through, select [BREAK]: the screen display returns to the input program

specification screen.)

(7) Termination

[Operation]

l - 92



5. OPERATION

$ Select [END] on the input program specification screen or the output item selection

screen.

8 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(8) [LIST] command (F2 KEY)

It is the same function as “53.1 The List of source program”.

refer to above paragraph.

Note) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, the function for printing

a diagram according to a specified control statement (file with extension .#LS) is not

supported. The [LIST] command for creating a control statement is not included in the

displayed function key menu and cannot be executed.

(9) The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model

1) Net Numbers

When a ladder diagram is edited, net numbers starting from 1 are assigned to

subprograms. When a ladder diagram is printed, sequential numbers are assigned to all

subprograms in ascending order of subprogram numbers.

2) Cross Reference

A cross reference can only include information referenced by the ladder, first, second, or

third level, or by ladder subprograms. If ladder subprogram PO001 is referenced only by a

step sequence subprogram, and if address PO001 is specified to print the cross reference,

there is “no reference information.”

3) Printing the Step Sequence Diagram

The step sequence diagram cannot be printed.

l - 93



5. OPERATION

5.3 Compilation

During compilation, an edited source program is translated into a ROM format file (object file)

executable by the PMC. Uncompiled programs cannot be transferred to the ROM writers (PMC

writer or FA writer) or RAM for the PMC. With PMC-R series, PMC-QC, PMC-NB. compilation can

be performed in one of two modes:

normal mode and condensed mode.

$$g - = - @ - andPMC

Transferred to the ROM writers

Condensed mode

With PMC-R series, PMC-CC, PMC-NB, a source program can be compiled in condensed

mode. When a ladder with the same number of steps is compiled in condensed mode, the

size of the created ROM format file is smaller than that created in normal mode. As a result,

condensed mode has the advantages listed below.

@ A larger C language area can be allocated.

Normal mode Condensed mode

ROM format file

Ladder

C

language

0 Time required for compilation is reduced.

0 Time required for transfer from the personal computer to the PMC is reduced.

@ A ROM module with a smaller capacity may be used.

l-94



5. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed mode has the restrictions described below.

0

8

5.3.1

Memory map changes (area expansion) are likely to occur when instructions, symbols,

comments, and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated by compilation in

condensed mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function. In

this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between the ladder area and

C language area.

ROM format file

1

Overlap (A C language program

map change is required.)

language 1

A ROM format file generated by compilation in condensed mode cannot be compared with

a ROM format file generated by compilation in normal mode.

Operation

(1) Start

[Operation]

a Select [COMPILJ (compile) from the main menu.

8 The compile screen appears (Fig. 5.3).

Comple

[email protected]>y<y?$y@gQ

\.i\.\ \.._,.,\

Sour ce r ogramame : A: YFLYi I ATAYTEST

ROWf or mat i l e name : A: YFLYDATAYTEST. t El

/

Seri es

Edi l i on

&chi ne tool name

VC L PUC name

Pr ograme o.

/

~--- -

Fig. 5.3 (a) Compile Screen

l - 95



5. OPERATION

General Flow of Operation for compiling

I

Main menu

I

$yg

Make#LSi’e

Main menu

Fig. 5.3 (b) Compiling General Operation and Screens

(2) Compiling

.- (a) Normal mode

When PMCPAljPA3 is used, selecting [EXEC] causes programs to compiled in the

condense mode.

[Operation]

@ Specify a source program name and ROM format file name. The ROM format file

name must conform to the MS-DOS specifications.

@ Select (EXEC].

Note) For PMC-PAlIPA3. compilation in condensed mode is done by [EXEC].

Q Compilation is performed in the normal mode.

@ When the compiler terminates normally, memory map information is output. When the

compiler terminates abnormally, an error message is output.

(b) Condensed mode

Compilation in condensed mode can

only be performed

with PMC-R series PMC-QC’PMC-

NB.

[Operation]

0 Specify a source program name and ROM format file name. The ROM format file

name must conform to the MS-DOS speciftcations.

8 Select [CONDNS]

Q Compilation is performed in condensed mode.

l-96



5. OPERATION

9 When the compiler terminates normally, memory map information is output. When the

compiler terminates abnormally, an error message is output.

(3)

Output of compiling result

The results of compilation are output to the screen displayed by [ERROR](F3

key)

and to the

following text files, irrespective of whether an error or warning has been issued. If many errors

occur, it is convenient to print out pr check the error fife with the text editor.

1) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, and if the following sample

source program is edited, the error and warning messages are output to the following file.

- Error file name

= “TEST.ERR”(depending on the source program)

Compiler

RCBGTEPEQ) [A:YFLYDATAWFCY

source progr m name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST

ROM

ormat

file name

:

A:YFLYDATAfTEST.EX

1

- Output directory

= “A: Y FLY DATA% ”

Series

Edition

Machine tool name

NC& PMC ame

Program no.

I

2) In other case than 1) above, the error and warning messages are output to the following

file.

- Error file name =

“FLMNE.ERR”(fixed name)

- Output directory =

“in which the FAPT LADDER system is stored”

(4) Termination

[Operation]

3

Select [END).

C?9 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

l - 97



5. OPERATION

(5) Specification of the input program name

(a) Specification of the input program name

It is possible to specify the extension of its input program name as following 3 types.

(Please refer to “1.1.2 compilation function” about #LS.)

* #LS

* #CN * No extension

Specify the file WITH its extension

It is possible to select the file name with its extension for the #LS-file and the source

program file.

Example for the #LS-file.

TESTDATA. LS

File name -

Example for the source program file.

TESTDATA. CN

File name -

Specify the file WITHOUT its extension

In case of there are some same file names (without its extension) for the #LS-file and

the source file, target file is selected by system.

The order of priority for the target file specification is shown below.

1 The #LS-file

2 The source program file

In case of inputting the source program file, please select the file name with its

extension.

(b) Changing the file name after using “the making # LS file”

In case of after using “the making # LS file” function with #LS-file, the input program name

is changed to the LS-file name with its extension.

(6) [LIST] Command (F4 KEY)

It is possible to use following functions by [LIST].

1)

The list of source program indications

2) Making “.#ls”-file

The “.#ls”-file name which is made by [LIST] function. is set into the space for source program

name.

Refer to next page about the details of above mentioned.

l - 98



5. OPERATION

Note) If the step sequence function is selected when setting a model, the link compile

function specified by the control statement,“file with extension .#LS”, is not used. The

[LIST] command, used to create a control statement, is not included in the function key

menu and cannot be executed.

(7) Indications of compilation result

MAIN.#LS

c

Specified source program name

##### PASS1 ###I#

+-Compilation result PASS 1

B:rb FLADDERY RC3ab MAIN

Source

program name

B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ I-STEP

(“MAIN.#LS”)

B: Y FLADDERS' MODULE+ SUBPl

B:a( FLADDERY MODULEY SUBPZ

B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ END-STEP

####t PASS2 #####

tcompilation result PASS 2

B:Y FLADDERY

B:M FLADDERY

B: + FLADDERY

Error

end 20

B: Y FLADDERY

Error end 31

B:Y FLADDERY

RC3Y MAIN

RC3Y l-STEP

MODULE+ SUBPl

MODULEM SUBPZ

RC3M END-STEP

(00111 Net ) -

(00001 Net )

compile completed error count=00002

warning count =OOOOO

PASS 1: Convert to object

PASS 2: Syntax check

5.3.2 Password set function

(PMGRAl/RA3/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2)

This function is supported only in the FS16/18/21 -B.

It enables a password to be added during compilation.

The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being

CRT:MDI. To discompile a ladder program guarded with a password,

password correctly.

(a)

Password types

There are two password types.

Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

Relative net

number in

each

program

displayed or edited on

the

it is necessary to enter the

Type

Use

Password (R)

Password to allow display on the FSlG-B

Password (R/W) Password to allow display and editing on the FSlG-B

I

l-99



5. OPERATION

(b) How to specify use of a password

To use a password, set as follows:

0 Open the initial set file (%%%FLSET.CNF), using a commercially available editor.

(cl

Password setting (compile)

:

FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

:

;

Text Editor

:

:

editor =;

rpl_dha = ;

ladkey ‘1;

password=O;

:

: t

j-1

:

*tJ;

0:No password

1:Password (R/W) and (R)

2:Password (R/W)

3:Password (RI

@ Specify whether to use a password and the type of a password (when used) after

password = .

Value Password type

0 No password is used.

1

Both password types R and RW are used.

2 Password type RW is used.

3 Password type R is used.

Q When password = 0 + Gotoo.

When password = 1. 2, or 3:

After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify

whether to use a password.

I

o you enter password? (Y/N)

I

To set a password. press Y

cl

+ If password = 1 or 3, go to 0.

If password = 2, go to @.

If it is unnecessary to set a password, press N

cl

+ Go to @.

l-100



5. OPERATION

@ The password (R) set screen appears.

Enter password (R)

@ Enter a password.

. A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and.;or numerals.

* Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. (If a lowercase

letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)

* It is impossible to use space, kana. kanji, and special characters (such as #, and @).

. Some character strings are unusable.

If

one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.

In such a case, use another character string.

* An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

* If the <RETURN> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a

password is not specified. -, If password = 1,

go

to @.

If password = 3, go to @.

* When <ESC> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued.

-+ GotoO.

@ The password configuration screen appears.

Verification (R)

I

0 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your

password was entered correctly.

* When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is

accepted.

. When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.

You are allowed to retry entering twice.

- When <ESC> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued.

+ Go tom.

If password = 3 is specified.

+ Go to@.

@ The password (R#V) set screen appears.

Enter password (R/W)

0 Enter a password (R/W).

- A password that can be

used is a combination of 8 or less letters

and or numerals.

. Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other. (If a lowercase

letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.)

. It is impossible to use space. kana. kanji. and special characters (such as *, #, and @).

. Some character strings are unusable.

If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed.

In

such a case, use another character string.

1- 101



5. OPERATION

.

An entered password is not displayed on the screen.

1

If the <RETURN> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a

password is not specified. + Go to@.

-

When c ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.

+ Go too.

@ The password confirmation screen appears.

Verification (R/W)

@ You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your

password was entered correctly.

-

When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is

accepted.

- When they do not match, the message “Password mismatch” is displayed.

.You are allowed to retry entering twice.

-

When -z ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password is rejected.

-+ Go to@.

@ Compilation begins.

(d) Password entry (discompile)

To discompile a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a password.

I

Set password type

I

Password type to be entered

IBoth password types (R) and (R.W)

Password type (R/W)

Password type (R)

Password type (R/w)

Password type (RMI)

Password type (R)

After discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears

Enter password (R)

-1 Note)

If an RMI password has been set

up, “password (R.‘W)” is

displayed.

When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins.

If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing

discontinues.

(You are allowed to retry entering twice.)

When <ESC> is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected.

l - 102



5. OPERATION

5.3.3 Changing the Order of Subprograms

When a program is compiled. the source program, subdivided i ntosubpr ogr ams, is converted to a

single ROM file. Within the ROM file, subprograms are arranged in ascending order of subprogram

numbers. The order in which subprograms are displayed on the edit screen of the built-in

programmer function of the PMC-RB4 or PMC-RC4 may be changed after the source program has

been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled, compiled, and downloaded.

5.3.4 It is possible to choose output data

(Symbol/Comment, Net comment) to ROM format file

Compi l e PMC- RB4 <O>[ A: YFLYDATAf RB4

Sourceprogram name

: A:

YFLYDATAYRB4

ROM

format file name

: A: YFLYDATAYRB4. #EX

Output t o ROMor mat i l e

SYMBOLi COkHENT

[F61

YES

NETCOMENT

tF71

PO1NTERSONLY

Compi l e

PMC- RB4

<O>[ A: YFLYDATAFRB4

Sourcepr ogr amname

: A:

YFLYDATAYRB4

ROMf or mat i l e name

: A:fFLYDATAYRB4.EX

_..:.:..::.‘~

::::..::.

Compi e nor mal end ~. . : . . . : : : : : j : : : . . . : : ~.

:: :

compi l ecompl et ed

er r or count = 000000 warni ngcount = 000000

1

EXEC 2 MAP 3 ERROR 4 5 F, SYMBOL 7

NETCMT 8 CONDNS g DOS 10

END

Fig.

53.4 (b )

Compile end

l - 103



5. OPERATION

(i) F6 [SYMBOL]

Select whether output or not output the symbol 8 comment data to ROM format file.

HoweverJhe symbols which can not be displayed on CRTiMDl (7bytes or more symbols)

and the coil comments assigned to them never output to ROM format file.

1)

“YES”: (Default setting)

The symbols which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil

comments assigned to them are output to ROM format file.

They can be displayed on CRT/MDI.

2)

"NO" :

No symbofcomment is converted to ROM format file.

Any symbol and comment is not displayed on CRTIMDI.

(ii) F7 [NETCMT]

If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether ‘Net comment pointer’

(Note2) is output to ROM format file or not.

1)

“POINTERS ONLY” : (Default setting)

To edit the ladder program by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT

LADDER, select this setting.

However, ladder size gets larger because ‘Net comment pointer’ is output to ROM

format file.

2)

"NO"

:

Any ‘Net comment pointer” is not output to ROM format file. In this case, ladder size in

the ROM format file is saved.

However, decompile the ROM format file makes its net comment data information lost.

Note 1)

This item is in effect for Source-format programs. At the compilation of FORMAT-B

source-program,this setting is ignored.

Note 2)

Net comment has its own character information only in a source program on the

personal computer.

Compiled ROM format file does not include any net comment characters.

Only ‘Net comment pointer’( =

information of net comment position.) can be

output to ROM format file as an functional instruction “NOP”.

This ‘Net comment pointer” helps to restore net comment date at decompiling the

ROM format file that is edited on CNC built-in editor and uploaded to FAPT

LADDER.

l-104



5. OPERATION

5.3.5

The list of source program

(a)


The file (selected directory) appears.

(4

Making the #LS-file

Please select the source program, and then the #LS-file is registered.

(Note) It is impossible to resister by source program of different PMC type. Because error

occur on print out/compilation operation.

The sequence of making the #LS-file as following flow chart.

Select the list of source program

Display the list of source program

(The target file indications)

Select one of source program

(Register to #LS-file)

(1) Start

(a) Select [LIST] (< F2 >

:

Print out/< F4 >

:

Compilation)

(b) “The list of

source

program” screen appears

The target file indications :

Source program file indications. (Indicated directory)

Indications

. .

DIR

: xxx

Meaning

Parent-directory

Sub-directory

PMC type

l - 105



5. OPERATION

Selected file indications :

Selected target file is indicated by absolute-pass.

F ig. 5.35 (1) The List of Source Program Screen

(2) Function key indications and selection

The list of source program functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

(a) [LIST1 1

EXEC

I

CHANGE EXTEND DRIVE SEARCH END

1 (W

1 (c)

(b) [CHANGE] 1

DELETE INSERT

CHANGE END

(c) [SEARCH) 5

TOP

BOTTOM

FILE

PCTYPE

END

1 (d)

(d) [PCTYPEJ 1

PREV NEXT END

l - 106



5. OPERATION

(3) Making of #LS-file [EXEC]

The sequence for registration source program file to #LS-file is shown below.

1. Source file indications (The target file indications)

2. The cursor moves to the selection file

3.

Push the <RETURN > key (Registration)

4.

Changing of selected file

(changing of the select file)

5.

Select [EXEC] (Making of the #LS-file + End)

The #LS-file name is changed to the “1st registered file name .#LS”.

Each data (System parameter~TitleSymbol&comment:Message/lO module) is effective in the

1st registered file.

(4)


(a) Changing of directory with drive [DRIVE]

Changing of “drive + directory” use [DRIVE] software key.

It is possible to change directory in the same directory by <cursor > keys.

The following message appears after push the [DRIVE].

’ INPUT DRIVE NAME, PLEASE '

Example

Specification of only drive

B:<RETURN>

(Changing to B:)

Specification by absolute-path + drive

B:\DATA<RETURN>

(Changing to B:\DATA)

(b) Changing of file extension [EXTEND]

[EXTEND] is used to change extension (A part of “ 5_ mark on Fig. 53.1 (2).

It is possible to indicate file name except source program by changing extension.

In case of there are some selected files, it is impossible to use this function.

Extension can be changed by [EXTEND]

Fig. 5.3.5 (2) A Part of Target File Indications

l-107



5. OPERATION

The following message appears after pushing the [EXTEND].

’

INPUT EXCHANGE EXTEND(MAX 3 CHA.) '

Result from specification

File indications (Without extension)

File name with specified extension

Searching for a ‘fle in the source file list

[SEARCH]

Following functions to &arch in the source file list are available.

(4

Searching for the first file [TOP]

The cursor moves to the first file in the current directory.

lb)

Searching for the

last

file [BOTTOM]

The cursor moves to the last file in the current directory.

w

Searching

by file name

[FILE]

Type a filename followed by [FILE].

When specified file exists, the cursor moves to the specified file.

When specified file does not exist, an error message is displayed. And then, it is possible

to continue to search by pressing any key.

To terminates the search function, press < ESC > key or select [EXEC].

(4

Searching by PMC

model

(PCTYPE)

1. Searching for the first file

[TOPI

2. Searching for the last file [BOTTOM]

3. Searching by file name

[FILE]

4. Searching by

PMC model [PCTYPE]

Type a PMC type, for example RC3, followed by [PCTYPE].

When files with specified PMC type exist, the cursor moves to the file. And then, it is

possible to select the file at

th

e cursor position by pressing <RETURN> key. And,

following operations are also allowed.

[PREV] searches backward for the previous occurrence of file with specified PMC type.

[NEXT] searches forward for the next occurrence of file with specified PMC type.

When no file with specified PMC type exrsts, an error message is displayed. And the, it is

possible to continue to search by pressing any key.

To terminates the search function, press < ESC z= key or select [ENDj.

l - 108



5. OPERATION

(6)

Changing the selected file list

[CHANGE]

Following functions to change the list of selected files are available.

1. Deleting a file [DELETE]

2. Inserting a file [INSERT]

This operation is also used to move the cursor between the source file list area and selected

file

(a)

list area.

Deleting a file [DELETE]

A file at the cursor position is deleted. And, the files following the deleted file are shifted

one line upward on the display.

(b]

Inserting a file [INSERT]

A blank line is inserted at the cursor position and then the cursor moves to the source file

list area.

By selecting a source file in the source file list area, the selected file is inserted at the

blank line and the cursor moves to the inserted file name.

(c]

Terminates the changing of selected file list [END]/ < ESC >

Function to change the selected file list terminates.

(7)

Terminating [END ]/ < ESC >

The source program listing function terminates.

In this case no .#LS file is created.

5.3.6

DOS

command

You can call MS-DOS shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing [DOS] key.

If you want to terminate this, key in the command as bellow at MS-DOS command line.

1 A:bEXIT 1

l-109



5. OPERATION

5.4 Decompilation

During decompilation, a

printed out.

ROM format file is translated into a source program that can be edited or

Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is ROM format file data. Data in the

ROM format file cannot be edited or printed out. Such data must be decompiled before it can be

edited or printed out.

(Note)

To discompile a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a

password. (See Section 5.3.)

5.4.1 Operation

(1)

Start

[Operation]

0 Select [DISCPL] (decompile) from the main menu.

8 The decompile screen appears (Fig. 5.4).

1 PMC:OS SERES

:

SerieS

COUiTER DATA TYPE

: 405 (

OBNAR’.l:BCD

)

3) LADDER EXEC

: 100% (

100 - 150% 1

4, (UNUSED

51 (UNUSED

6~ (UNUSED ’

7 (UNUSED

I

8) SYNCHRONZED LEVEL 3 :

0

( 0NO 1YES )

9) P&ZOS EDTON

Fig. 5.4 Discompile Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation]

0 Specify a ROM format file name and source program name.

8 Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

l-110



5. OPERATION

0 Decompilation is performed and memory map information is output.

@ When the decompiler terminates normally, the message “DECOMPILE TERMINATED

NORMALLY” is output. When the decompiler terminates abnormally, an error message is

output.

(3) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].


(Note 1) During decompilation,

PASCAL and C language data is lost.

After editing and

recompilation, link PASCAL and C language data again.

(Note 2)

A ROM format file generated by compilation in

condensed mode can be decompiled

using the same operation. After editing, the source program can be recompiled in

condense moded, if necessary.

l - 111



5. OPERATION

5.4.2 Outputting to split files

When the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they are split into units of

subprograms and output to different files. For details, see Section 9.1.

ROM program

- END3 (SUB 3)

- SP (SUB 7

- SPE (SUB 72) v

- SP (SUB 71) PO02

- SPE (SUB 72) L

- SP (SUB

I- I

H END (SUB 64) 1-1

I

1

1

I

Source program

LEVEL1 #LA

Ladder 1st level

1

LEVEL2.#LA

Ladder 2nd level

1

LEVELB.#LA

1

adder 3rd level

1

The END instruction is not included in

the source program.

The instruction is automatically added

when the program is compiled.

1-112



5. OPERATION

54.3 Converting a step sequence program according to the model

Usually, mnemonics are used to convert a ladder program according to the model.

However, a ROM file is used only when a step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) is

converted for the PMCRC4(STEP SEQ.

[Procedure]

1) Compile the step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) and create a ROM

program.

2) Set model PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) for FAPT LADDER.

3) Select F4 (DECOMPILE) from the main menu.

4) Specify the ROM file created in step 1) bove and decompile the program.

The program is converted. The step sequence program read into FAPT LADDER can be used for

the PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ.

5.4.4 Merge

In case the existent file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent

source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents of ROM data.

In this case it is possible to merge the Ladder in ROM data with the SymboVCommnet in source

program by specifying the undermentioned function-key.

- When the used name is specified for source program

Decompile PMC-RB4 <O>[A:YFL%DATAYRB4 ]

ROM format file name

:

A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX

Source program name

:

A:yFLYDATAyRB4

OOutput to Source program

SYMBOL/COMMENT

MERGE

[F4] YES

Duplicated symbol definition

[FS] SOURCE DATA(effective)

Specified source program already exists.

Overwrite 7 (Y/N)

1-113



5. OPERATION

(1)

(2)

F4 [MERGE]

This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by “NO” or “YES”.

1)

2)

“NO” : (Default setting)

The existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the

contents of ROM data.

There is no display of “F5[SYNBOL)” in this condition.

“YES” :

The symbolkommnet in source program is merged with that in ROM data. As for the other

data except symbol/comment, ROM data is effective.

Just after this specification, F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol

definition is effective, either in source program or in ROM data, when they are in conflict.

F5 [SYMBOL]

F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed when “YES” is specified for F4[SYMBOL].

This specification decides which symbol definition in either source program or ROM data is

effective when they are in conflict.

1) “SOURCE DATA” : (Default setting)

The symbol definition in source program is effective.

2) “ROM DATA”

The symbol definition in ROM data is effective.

l-114



5. OPERATION

(3) The combination of F4[MERGE] and F5[DUPADR], and its result.

+-I-

OM format file

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte)

COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0

xxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

R1.4

YYYYYY

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Source program

- Symbol/Comment data

ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

x0.0

AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3

BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

Y4.7

YYYYYY

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

+a) The result of "MERGE = NO"

Source program

x0.0

xxxxxx

R1.4 YYYYYY

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

tb) The result of "MERGE =

YES" and "Symbol definition = ROM data".

Source program

x0.0

xxxxxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

Y2.3 BBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

Y4.7 YYYYYY

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

tc) The result of "MERGE = YES" and

"Symbol definition=source program".

Source program

x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

Y2.3

BBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

R1.4 YYYYYY

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

l - 115



5. OPERATION

5.5 Link

During linking, load modules created in the C language, PASCAL, or other language are linked with

a ROM format file. The C language can be used only with PMCNIRCIRC3iRC4/QCINB. and

PASCAL can be used only with PMC-N. Linking is not required when the C language, PASCAL, or

similar language is not used.

_

Transferred to the ROM writers

and PMC

(Note 1)

The format of load modules varies between PMC-N and PMCRC/RC3/RC4:QC/NB.

However, linking with FAPT LADDER is the same.

(Note 2)

This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer. In addition, with

this function, a ROM format file holding only ladder data, and C language or PASCAL

load modules can be separately transferred to and linked on the PMC (dotted line in

the figure below).

C prooram development environment for PMC-N

- Personal computer

C language source

FANUC

1

distribution

1

ICM (compiler)

library

1

LMB (linker)

LMT (converter)

1

C language load module

ttt

Link

+

ROM format file with

C language/PASCAL

load modules linked

- FAPT LADDER

. . . . . _ROMformat

file

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

r

MC-N

P-G

FAPT PASCAL

PASCAL load

Debug

1-116



5. OPERATION

C oroqram development environment for PMC-RC (RC3 RCWQC NB)

-Personal computer

Link control statement

creation tool

J

C language source

Link control source

J-Y

iC286 (compiler)

FANUC distribution

1 -library

BND386 (binder)

+

BLD386 (binder)

$_

0J386 (converter)

+

Intel hexadecimal - HEX2SREC (Note) -

load module

ROM format

file

Link _ ROM format file -

with C language

-:

load modules linked

L:

I t

FAPT LADDER

-:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*

I

r

PMC_RC

’ i I

vv$

I

(Note) FAPT LADDER does not allow Intel hexadecimal load modules to be linked. Before link

operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC User’s Manual.

On the PMCRCIRC3IRC4IQC/NB, load modules created in the development languages

indicated above cannot be directly linked. Perform the below operation before linking. This

program is provided on the following floppy disk:

RBiRC Module Floppy

(A08B-9200-J604 #JP)

Edition 3.1 or later

(A08B-9201 -J604 #EN) Edition 3.1 or later

QC Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J605#JP)


(A08B-9201 -J605-#EN)


NB Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J606#JP)


(A08B-9201 -J606-#EN)


[Operation]

0 Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the MS-DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

A:\FLADDER\APPENDIX, HEXZSREC input-file-name output-file-name

8 Conversion is performed.

1-117



5. OPERATION

@ Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

@ Specify an output file name

linking.

(for example. SAMPLE.%) as the load

module file name for

(Note)

When the extension

of an input file name is omitted, the

extension

“.HEX” is

assumed. Output is

directed to a file with the same name

but the extension is

changed to “SR.”

The specification of the following files has the same effect in

input/output:

HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE.SR

HEX2SREC SAMPLE SAHPLE.SR

HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX

HEXZSREC SAMPLE

(1) Starting linking

(Operation]

@I Select [LINK] from the main menu.

8 The link screen appears (Fig. 5.5).

Load modue file name

ROM format file name

: AYDATAYCMODULE SR

: AYDATAYSAMPLE #EK

Series Edtion Machne too name

NC & PMC name

Program no

Fig. 5.5 Link Screen

(2) Linking

[Operation]

@ Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. The load module file

name must conform to MS-DOS specifications. Here the load module file name should be

specified with its extension (--------.

*). For PMC-RC, specify an output program

name for HEX2SREC.

8 Select [EXEC].

1-118



5. OPERATION

a Linking is executed.

(3) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].


5.6 Input/Output

There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.

1) ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).

2) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.

3) Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette

Adapter or Handy File, respectively.

On the PC-9801 series PC, types 1) and 2) require RSDRV.SYS, which is an MS-DOS standard

device driver. Install it according to the description in Section 2.1.

[Operation]

0 Switch off the personal computer and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS232C

cable. (See Appendix 1.)

0 Before starting FAPT LADDER, make sure that RSDRVSYS has been installed.

0 Start FAPT LADDER.

@ Select [ l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

@ The input/output menu appears.

1-119



5. OPERATION

Table 5.6 Baud Rate Setting

Input/output destination

ROM writers

(PMC WRITER, FA WRITER)

Baud rate setting (bps)

4800

FANUC Series 0 (PMC-L/M M (MMC))

FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E (PMC-P)

FANUC Series 15 (PMC-N)

FANUC Series 158 (PMC-NA)

4800 (9600) (Note 1)

4800 (9600)

(Note 2)

480019600

(Note 3)

FANUC Series 16/18 20 (PMC-R series)

FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB)

FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-QC)

FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMCPAl/PA3)

4800/9600

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

In input/output operations with the FANUC Series 0. a transmission at 9600 bps is

possible only for downloading on the PMC LOADING screen. In this case, it is

necessary to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal computer.

In input/output operations with the FANUC Power Mate MODEL-A/B/C/D, a

transmission at 9600 bps is possible only for uploading and comparison. In this

case, it is necessary to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal

computer.

In input/output operations with the FANUC Series 15, transmissions at both 4800

and 9600 bps are possible. In this case, it is necessary to make the settings of the

CNC match those of the personal computer.

[Reference] I 0 port setting

FAPT LADDER sets up ports according to the values in the following data files.

1) PC9801 version :

FLIO 98.DAT

2) IBM PC/AT version :

FLIO-AT.DAT

-

These files are in text format. So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

l-120



1) Contents of the FLl0_98DAT

(effective data section only)

DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET

FA-WRITER = RO. 4800. B8, PN. S2, NONE

PMC-WRITER

= RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE

PMC-L

= RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2. NONE

PMC-M

=RO, 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE

PMC-M (TT)

= RO, 4800.88, PN. S2, NONE

PMC-M (AXIS)

= RO. 4800.88, PN. S2. NONE

PMC-MMC = RO, 4800, 88. PN. S2. NONE

PMC-MMC (AXIS) = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE

PMC-N -RD. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-P - RO, 4800, B8, PN, S2. NONE

PMC-OA - RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-M (I/O)

= RO. 4800, B8, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-M (I/O, TT)

=RO, 4800,88. PN. S2, NONE

PMC-M (l/O, AXIS) = RO. 4800,88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-N (l/O)

= RO, 9600.88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RB

= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RC

= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RAl = RO, 9600,68, PN, 52, NONE

PMC-RAP

= RO, 9600, 88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RBP = RO, 9600, 88. PN. S2, NONE

PMC-RA3 = RO, 9600. 88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RB3

= RO, 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RC3 = RO. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-PA1 = RO, 9600.88, PN, S2. NONE

PMC-PA3 = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2. NONE

PMC-OC

=RO. 9600, B8. PN. S2, NONE

PMC-NB

= RO. 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RB4 = RO, 9600,88, PN. S2. NONE

PMC-RC4 = RO, 9600, 88, PN. S2. NONE

PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEC)) = Ro, 9600, B8. PN, S2, NONE

PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEO) = RO, 9600,88. PN, S2. NONE

5. OPERATION

2) Contents of the FLIO_AT.DAT

(effective data section only)

DATA-BLOCK = IO-PORT-SET

PM&WRITER

FA-WRITER

PMC-L

PMC-M

PMC-M (-IT)

PMC-M (AXIS)

PMC-MMC

PMC-MMC (AXIS)

PMC-N

PMC-P

PMC-QA

PMC-M (l/O)

PMC-M (I/O, TT)

PMC-M (I/O, AXIS)

PMC-N (l/O)

PMC-RB

PMC-RC

PMC-RAl

PMC-RA2

PMC-RB2

PMC-RA3

PMC-RB3

PMC-RC3

PMC-PA1

PMC-PA3

PMC-QC

PMC-NB

PMC-RB4

PMC-RC4

PMC-RB4 (STEP-SEQ) =COMl : 96, N. 8, 2

PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEQ) =COMl : 96, N, 8.2

=COMl : 48, N. 8.2

=COMl : 48,

N. 8. 2

=COMl : 48,

N. 8. 2

=COM1:48.N,8.2

=COMl : 48,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 48,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 48.

N, 8, 2

=COMI : 48.

N, 8,2

-COMl : 96,

N. 8.2

=COMl : 48,

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 48,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 48.

N, 8,2

=COtVll : 48, N, 8,2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8.2

-COMl : 96,

N, 8, 2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96.

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96.

N, 8.2

-COMl : 96.

N, 8.2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8, 2

-COMl : 96,

N. 8, 2

= COMl : 96.

N, 8,2

=COMl : 96,

N, 8.2

=COMl : 96,

N. 8, 2

Entity on the left-hand side of each equal sign ( =) : Device

Entity on the right-hand side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each

SPEED/MODE command. Only the first parameter (port number) and second parameter (baud

rate) can be changed.

1 - 121



5. OPERATION

5.6.1 ROM

writers

(PMC

writer,

FA

writer)

ROM format data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. For information on the setting of a

personal computer for I/O operation, see Section 5.6.

ROMs which can be used depend on the

PMC model, as indicated in Table 56.1. When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.

Table

5. 6. 1

ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model

PMC model Usable ROM

PMC-L/M

256K-bit ROM, 2 each (note 1)

PMC-N

ROM cassette A, B, C, D, and E

PMC-RAl /RA2/RA3/RB

lM-bit ROM

PMCRB2/RB3

lM-bit ROM/ROM module B (note 2)

PMC-RCIRC3

ROM module A, B, C, and D

PMC-QA

ROM cassette A, B

(1)

Read

[Operation]

0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [READ].

@ Enter the name of a ROM format file containing read data.

@I Read operation is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When read operation terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Write

[Operation]

0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [WRITE].

8 Enter the name of a ROM format file to be written.

@ Writing is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

6 When writing terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

l-122



5. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation]

0 Select

[WRT]

(writer) on the I/O menu

screen.

8 Select [VERIFY].

@ Enter the name of a ROM format file to be verified.

@ Verification is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

8 When verification terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4)

Blank check

[Operation]

0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I10 menu screen.

8 Select [BLANK] (blank check).

(3 Enter the name of a ROM format file to check.

@I Blank checking is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When blank checking terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].


(Note 1) Input/output with ROM for PMC-UM

With PMC-UM, a high ROM is paired with a low ROM. When performing I/O to and

from ROM with an FA writer on a PMC-L/M, FAPT LADDER allows a pair of a high

ROM and low ROM to be processed concurrently. At this time, the < F2 > key can

be used to switch between the processing of a single ROM or the processing of a

pair of ROMs.

1 - 123



5. OPERATION

1st PAIR

2nd PAIR 3rd PAIR

4th PAIR

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

High side Low side

0

q

0clOClcl

PMC-L 0E2

, PMC-M OF2

Socket allocation for concurrent processing of pairs of ROMs with the FA writer

OEl

OF1

Writinq

During concurrent writing, data can be written to a maximum of four pairs of ROMs.

Readina and verification

During concurrent reading or verification, only one pair of ROMs can be handled at a time.

When two or more pairs are set, the ROMs with the smallest socket number are read or

verified.

(Note 2) When writing 1Mbit ROM for PMC-RB2 with FA writer, “ID ERROR” will be

displayed on FA writer. But writing terminates normally.

(Note 3) PMC-P, PA1IPA3, NB, QC do not transfer data to and from EPROM. (EPROM

cannot be installed in PMC-P, PAlIPA3, NB, QC.)

5.6.2

Transfer to and from PMC-L/M (FANUC Series 0)

Data can be transferrod to and from PMC-L/M. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal

PMC loading screen

+I I/O (P-G) screen 1

I I

- FAPT LADDER 1 )- FSO

Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps

Parameter No. 0060

11Download IL

I

4800

bps (fixed)

(Note)

II

Upload Ib

4800 bps (fixed)

(Note)

4800 bps (fixed)

(Note)

I I

FSO baud rate settinq

4 PO (P-G) screen 1

I

1

computer for I/O operz.:lon.

(Note) A ladder editing cassette is required for this operation.

1-124



5. OPERATION

SYSTEM P-MODEL G

PHC LOADING

READ OR WRITE OR VERIFY

ADDRESS :

OOOOH

EXECUTING

DATA

:

OOH

i

1 [CANCEL] [ 11 II 1

Fig. 5.6.2 (a) PMC Load Screen

Fig. 5.6.2 (b) l/O (P-G) Screen

(1) FSO baud rate setting

This setting functions only for download operation using the PMC load screen.

[Operation]

*O Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*Q A baud rate can be set by specifying the parameter as follows:

bit 7

bit 6 bit 5

bit 4 bit 3

bit 2

bit 1

bit 0

0060

PCLDB

PCLDB 0 : 4800 bps

1 : 9600 bps

*a After a parameter change, turn the power off then on again.

(2) Download

(a) Download (using the PMC load screen)

[Operation]

0 Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.

8 Select (DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

@ Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press c 1> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.

(Select (1) LOAD FROM I/O. The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(a) appears.)

Position the cursor on LOAD for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press

the <RETURN> key.

Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

1-125



5. OPERATION

(b) Download (operation using the l/O (P-G) screen)

[Operation]

@Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOADJ (download) on the PMC menu screen.

8 Enter a ROM format file name.

*@ Press < 5 > on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.

(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig.

5.6.2(b) appears.)

451 Position the cursor on EDIT for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press

the <RETURN> key.

@ Download operation is executed. During operation, the indication

“EXECUTING”

blinks.

@I When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(Note)

During downloading to PMC-L/M, symbol and comment data is not transferred.

(3) Upload

[Operation]

0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

@ Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press <5> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.


*@ Press the CNC soft keys [VO] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)

appears.)


@ Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

Q When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

l-126



5. OPERATION

(4) Comparison

[Operation ]

@ Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

0 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

43 Press <5> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.


*@I Press the CNC soft keys [I/O] and [P-G] in this order. (The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)

appears.)


@ Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

B When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL

END”

is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].

C3 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

(Note) In the operations above, an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an operation

on the CNC.

l-127



5. OPERATION

5.6.3 Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E)

Data can be transferred to and from PMC-P. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal

computer for 1’0 operation.

To transfer data to and from PMC-P, some parameters need to be set

on the Power Mate. Set the parameters according to Item (1) below.

- FAPT LADDER

1 Download //

1 Upload 1

11 Comparison It

4800 bps (fixed)

I

1


Parameter Nos. &0226 or &0227


Parameter Nos. &0226 or &0227

(1) Power Mate-MODEL

A/B/C/E setting

L

Power Mate-MODEL A’BIC’E baud rate setting

. Power Mate-MODEL _

A/B/C/E

PMC loading

screen

J Diagnostic screen 1

4 Diagnostic screen 1

PMC-P needs to be made ready for 110 operation. The operation below is required on the Power

Mate.

[Operation ]

$0 Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.

*a Position the cursor on the I 0 parameter, then press < 0 > < INPUT > or < 1 > <INPUT > .

(Specify 0 or 1 in the I 0 parameter setting.)

*O Set the parameters as follows:

When I 0 parameter settinq = 0

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3

bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

&0006

&0009

&0014

&0226

I-I-I-I-I-I-lOIll

I

1 _ _ - -

0 - 1

I

I

0 _ - _ - - - -

I I I I I

I I I

I

BRATEO

I

BRATEO 1 0: 4800 bps

1 1 : 9600 bps

1-128



5. OPERATION

When the I/O parameter settino = 1

II0006

a0010

&0014

8~0227

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

I

BRATEl

BRATEl 1 0: 4800 bps

1 1 : 9600 bps

(Note) The mark ‘-’

represents a parameter not associated with this function.

*@ After a parameter change, turn the power off and then on again.

(2) Download

[Operation]

0 Select [PMC] on the I 0 menu screen.

8 Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.

*@ Turn on power to the CNC while holding down < 0 > and <X/AXIS > at the same time.

*@ The indication “PMC LOADING” is output on the CRT screen of the CNC.


8 Downloading is executed.

During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks, and the

address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up.

@ When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(Note)

During downloading to PMC-P, symbol and comment data is not transferred.

(3) Upload

[Operation]

Select [PMC] on the I 0 menu screen.

Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

Enter a ROM format file name.

l-129



5. OPERATION

@I The indication “PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*8 Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSIPARAM > twice to display the diagnostic

screen.

*@3 Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press <WRITE> while holding down < * >.

(?I Uploading is executed.


address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up. On the CNC, the indication “WRITE” blinks.

@ When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output. On the

CNC, the indication “WRITE” disappears.

(4) Comparison

[Operation]

0 Select ]PMC) on the I/O menu screen.

8 Select [COMPARJ (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.


@I The indication “PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*@ Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSPARAM > twice to display the diagnostic

screen.

*Q Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press C WRITE> while holding down < ’ >-

8 Comparison is executed.


address indication (ADDRESS =) counts up. On the CNC, the indication “WRITE” blinks.

@I When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output. On the

CNC, the indication “WRITE” disappears.

(5) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].



on the CNC.

l-130



5. OPERATION

5.6.4 Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A,

-MODEL B)

Data can be transferred to and from PMC-N. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal

computer for I/O operation. To transfer data to and from PMC-N, FS15 baud rate setting is

required. See Item (1) below.

- FAPT LADDER -

1 Download b

II

Upload Ib

1 Comparison b


[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]


fDATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)1


[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]

FS15 baud rate settinq

FS15

Title screen

I

I/O screen

I

j110[

(1) FS15 baud rate setting

FS15 baud rate setting is required. On the FSl5, data can be transferred at either 9600 bps or

4800 bps. The baud rate setting on the personal computer needs to match the baud rate setting

on the FS15. Operation on the FS15 is described below.

[Operation]

*@ Press the < CNCIPMC > key.

*8 Press the soft keys [PCPRM] and [MODE] in this order.

*@ The following information is output on the CRT screen of the CNC:

PMC MODE

PMC DATA INITXALIZE

O

ON

DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)

9600BPS 4800BPS

DATA TRANSFER TO RAMBOARD MANUAL AUTO

RAM ENABLE (PC DGN,EDIT)

O

ON

DATA TRANSFER RATE (AUX)

4800BPS 9600BPS

*@ Press the values of both DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE) and DATA TRANSFER

RATE (AUX) by moving the cursor and using soft keys.

1 - 131



5. OPERATION

(2) Download

[Operation]

@ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.


*$ Press the <CNC/PMC> key of the CNC.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [EDIT] and [TITLE] in this order.


@ Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

B When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(3) Upload

[Operation]


8 Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.


@I Initialization is started and the indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” is output.

61 The indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” disappears.

After a few seconds, the indication

“PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

*@ Press the <CNC PMC> key of the CNC.

*8 Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS), [OUTPUT], [ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

@I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

@I When uploading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(4) Comparison

IOperation]


8 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

1-132



5. OPERATION


@ Initialization is started and the indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” is output.

0 The indication “INITIALIZE EXECUTE” disappears.

After a few seconds, the indication

“PLEASE SET UP PMC” is output.

* I3 Press the < CNC’PMC > key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS], [OUTPUT], [ALL], and [P-G] in this order.

@ Comparison iS executed. During operation, the indication “EXECIJTING” blinks.

@I When comparison terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(5) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].


(Note 1) In the operations above,

an asterisk prefixed to a circled number represents an

operation on the CNC.

(Note 2) For FS15, it is possible UPLOAD, COMPARISON PMC program without PASCAL, C

LANGUAGE data.

In this case, please change (3 of each function as below.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS], [OUTPUT], [LADDER], and [P-G] in

this order.

1-133



5. OPERATION

5.6.5 Input/Output for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate)

Before PMC-CA and the ladder program are transmitted, the following (1) or (2) must be

performed.

Whether (1) or (2) is depended on the model of FD Mate.

(1) Setting of FD Mate PMC communicative utility FLEX OS version

(a) File configuration

The configuration of files in the floppy disk is as follows:

C

DRIVERS

--c

ACILOAD. BAT (Driver installation batch file)

FDM_SCD. DRV

UTILS

1

FDUTILS. 286 (Utility start file)

PGFD. 286

PGSV. 286

FDSV. 286

(b) Installing the driver

The driver must be installed only once when power to the main unit is turned on. After the

operating system starts, insert the floppy disk of external equipment input/output software

into drive A in the following example and enter the following commands.

To change drives

To change directories

To install the driver A : DRIVERS > ACILOAD r Return J

FD Mate Main unit

6 : >A-rReturnJ

A

A:>

A : >CD DRIVERS r Return J

A : DRIVERS/>

Note 1)

The underlined portions indicate data entered from the keyboard. J

indicates soft key entry. Other portions are displayed by the system. Key entries

are not case sensitive. The following explanations are given in this format.

Note 2) Incorporate the RS-232-C serial driver into memory with a logical name (ser:).

(The system needs to be changed so that the serial drive is loaded with ser: when

the operating system is started.)

The following define statement must be entered from the keyboard according to the

driver version after the driver is installed.

define -s fanuc_ser = ON

In the above example, enter the following from the keyboard:

B: DRIVERS > define -s fanuc ser = ON

1-134



5. OPERATION

Starting the utility

The utility must be started whenever data is input or output between the PMC and the

external equipment.

In the following example, the floppy disk containing external equipment input/output

software is assumed to be inserted in drive B.

To change drives

To change directories

To start the utility

The screen display

changes to the main

screen. (Main unit)

Procedure for Starting the Utility

FD Mate Main unit

A : >B *r ReturnJ

B:>

B : > CD UTILS I- Return J

B : UTILS/>

B : UTILS > FDUTILS r Return J

Utility main = = =

____----___-______-_____________________----

1 : PMC-----HO/F0

2 : PMC-----Device

3 : HDIFD---Device

4 : spare

0 : Quit

Enter the desired menu number and press the RETURN key. The numbers correspond to

the following processing.

1:

Transmits data between the PMC and the HDI’FD.

2: Transmits data between the PMC and the external equipment (connected through

RS-232-C).

3: Transmits data between the HDiFD and the external equipment (connected through

RS-232-C).

4:

This function is not currently used.

0: Terminates the utility.

Numbers other than the above are not accepted.

If an incorrect number is entered, delete the number with the BS or DEL key and enter the

desired number.

1 - 13s



5. OPERATION

(2) Setting the UNIX version of the F-D Mate PMC communication utilities

(a) File configuration

The configuration of utility files on the distribution floppy disk is as shown below.

UTILS

F

FDUTILS (utility startup file)

FDSV

PGFD

PGSV

(b) Driver installation and utility startup

Operation on the Main screen

(1) Create an appropriate directory on the # mkdir directorv-name

hard disk.

r Return J

(2) Make the directory created in step (1)

# cd directorv-name r Return J

current.

(3) Copy the utility software on the floppy

# doscD A:IUTILS/FDUTILS . r Return J

disk (drive A) to the current directory.

# doscD A:/UTILS/FDSV

r

Return J

# doscp AYUTILS’PGFD .

r Return J

# dosco AYUTILWPGSV .

r Return J

(4) Make the copied files executable. # chmod +x * r Return J

(5) Specify a path.

# PATH = $PATH:.;export PATH

r Return J

(6) Start a utility. (Note)

# FDUTILS r Return J

(Note)

The method of using the UNIX version differs from that of the Flex version in the

following two points.

1. Filenames must be in lowercase letters.

2. ACILOAD is unnecessary.

1-136



(3) Preparing transmission in the main unit

5. OPERATION

Enter 2 to display the

main screen.

Press any key other

than the control key.

The message on the

Vight is displayed.

Change to the PMC

screen

1

peration in the main unit

===

Utility main = = =

-----------------------------------------.------

1 : PMC

-----HO/F0

2 : PMC-----Device

3 : HDIFD---Device

4 : spare

0 : Quit

------------------------------------------------

Select 3 : 2

Press any key, to execute child program

Press ESC key, if you stop it

Read/Write PMC data utility

ver. 1.00 -

Press the CTRL + ALT + HOME, or MODE

key.

To stop this program, press the ESC key on the screen in the main unit. Then, the utility is

terminated and the following message appears:

End of child program

Press RETURN key, to go ahead

Pressing the RETURN key returns to the main screen in (c).

Note) If the CTRL + S key is pressed while the utility is running, the program stops. However,

pressing the CTRL+Q key restarts the program.

Pressing any key other than the

(CTRL + Q) key while the program is stopped causes abnormal termination (hang-up).

l-137



5. OPERATION

(4) Down load


in the main unit of

F-D Mate

To put the

personal

computer in the

reception wait

status

To output

sequence data

from the PMC

4t transmission

Operation in the personal compu

@I Select [PMCJ from the

input/output menu screen.

@ Select [DNLOAD] (download)

from the PMC menu screen.

aEnter the name of the ROM

format file.

a Initialization begins, and the

message “INITIALIZE EXECUT

appears.

The screen display changes, and

“PMC SIDE SET I/O DISPLAY, At

KEY IN FILE NAME.” is displayed

The EXECUTING turns on and off

and the counter is displayed at tht

bottom of the screen.

Operation in the F-D Mate main

unit:PMC

3 Start the utility. (See Subset.

3.4.1.)

3 Select PMC - Device.

Select 7 : 2

D Press MODE key or press

CTRL + ALT + HOME key to

display the PMC screen.

D Press the IO key to display the IO

screen.

3 Press the FDCAS key to display

the FDCAS screen.

D Press the OUTPUT key to select

OUTPUT.

0, Press the LADDER key to select

LADDER.

YpPress the P-G key to select P-G.

The displayed value indicating an

address is counted.

If transmission terminates normally, the personal computer displays “NORMAL END” and the

PMC displays OUTPUT COMPLETED.

1-138



5. OPERATION

(5) Upload


in the main unit of

F-D Mate

To put PMC in

the reception wait

status

To output

sequence data

from the personal

computer

At transmission

Operation in the P-G Mate

@ Select [PMC] from the

input/output menu screen.

0 Select [UPLOAD] (upload) from

the PMC menu screen.

@Enter the name of the ROM

format file.

@Initialization begins, and the

message “INITIALIZE EXECUTE”

appears.

The EXECUTING turns on and off,

and the counter is displayed at the

bottom of the screen.

Operation in the F-D Mate main

unit/PMC

3 Start the utility. (See (3))

3 Select PMC - Device.

Select ? : 2

3 Press the MODE key or

CTRL + ALT + HOME key to

display the PMC screen.

9 Press the EDIT key to display the

EDIT screen.

9 Press the TITLE key to display the

TITLE screen.

The displayed value indicating a size

s counted.

If transmission terminates normally, the personal computer displays “NORMAL END” and the

PMC displays INPUT COMPLETED.

1-139



5. OPERATION

5.6.6 Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB/QC

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C. In this case, personal computer port must be set.

See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal computer for I/O operation.

- FAPT LADDER 1

1 Download f

II

Upload Ik

II Comparison II-

9600 bps14800 bps

9600 bps14800 bps

FS16/18/15B

-Power Mate-D, -

F-D Mate mini

w-1

PMC (I/O) screen

9600 bps/4800 bps

PMC (I/O) screen

Baud rate settina for FSl6/18/15B, Power Mate-D, and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download

[Operation]



$8 Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.


@ Downloading is executed. During operation, the indication “EXECUTING” blinks.

8 When downloading terminates normally, the indication “NORMAL END” is output.

(2) Upload

If the PMCRCRC3, -CC, or -NB is used, language data (C language) other than Ladder

programs can be used. When uploading or comparison is executed from one of these PMCs,

one of two data types (LADDER or ALL) can be specified. LADDER and ALL have the

following meanings:

LADDER Sequence program only

ALL

Sequence program and language data (C language)

l-140



5. OPERATION

Specify either data type in step 8 of the operation described below:

[Operation]


8 Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press the <SYSTEM> key of the CNC.

*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], (IO], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.


@ Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.

(?I Uploading is executed. During operation, the indication

“EXECUTING” blinks.

@ When uploading terminates normally, the indication

“NORMAL END” is

output.

(3) Comparison

[Operation]

0 Select [PMC] on the 11’0menu screen.

C 9 Select [COMPAR] (comparison) on the PMC menu screen.

*a Press the <SYSTEM > key of the CNC.

*@I Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], [I/O], [HOST], and [EXEC]

in this order.


6) Comparison is executed. During operation, the indication

“EXECUTING”

blinks.

8 When comparison terminates normally, the indication

“NORMAL END”

is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation]

0 Select [END].

(21 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.


on the CNC.

l- 141



5. OPERATION

(5)

CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D

The NC of the Power Mate-D has the CRT/MD1 screen and the DPUMDI screen. When the

CRTlMDl screen is used, the procedures for data input/output are the same as those with the

PMC-R Series ((1) to (4) above). When the DPUMDI screen is used, the procedures for data

input/output are different from those with the PMC-R Series.

When the DPL/MDI screen is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as

described below:

(a)

Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPUMDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen.

03

Press the c READ> or c WRITE> key on the DPUMDI screen.

w

Follow procedures (1) to (4) described above on the personal computer.

5.6.7


A ROM format file compiled in a personal computer can be converted to a memory card format file,

and output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer. The

PMC program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory

card in the memory card interface in the CNC.

By reversing the procedure, programs can be

transferred from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

5.6.7.1

PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC

[Operation]

Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

Compile a source program to create a ROM format file.

Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output) from

it.

Select [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

F4 KEY : Handy Fle

F5 KEY : Memory card

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a) InputiOutput Menu

1-142



5. OPERATION

@

Select

[WRITE]

(write (programmer -> memory card)).

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b) Memory Card Input/Output Screen

@ Convert the file from ROM format to memory card format.

Specify the following items for execution.

Name of the ROM format file

Specify the ROM format file to be converted.

Name of the memory card file

Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the

CNC) to be created by conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

l /O i TO UC ::

&BP

WRTE (PROCRAWR - > Memory Card

ROM FORMAT FLE NAME

: AYDATAAYSAMFLE llEX

Memory Card FLE NAME

: DYSAMPLE XBF

(Specfy the MEMORY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.1 (c) InputlOutput (to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

l-143



5. OPERATION

0 The following two methods can be used to insert the memory card output in step @ into

the

memory card interface in the CNC and read programs on the memory card.

0

Using the I/O function of the PMC

Specify M-CARD, READ, and the desired filename or file number at DEVICE,

FUNCTION, and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, respectively. “7en press soft key

[EXECJ. Sequence programs are read from the memory card file created in step 0.

PMC 110 screen

PMCI/O

PROGRAM

CHANNEL = 1

DEVICE

= M-CARD

~;~~J..~~~Ij-j~;~ READ

DATA KIND = LADDER

FILE NO.

q

( #NAME )

MONIT STOP

I

EXEC I [CANCEL]WRITE I[ READ [COMPARI

Using the BOOT SYSTEM at power-on time

See Appendix 5.

5.6.7.2

PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

PMC programs are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface in the CNC. When

the memory card is inserted in a memory card interface in the personal computer, the PMC

programs on the memory card can be accessed as ordinary MS-DOS files.

[Operation]

0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,

FUNCTION, LADDER, and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, respectively, then press soft

key [EXEC]. Sequence programs are output to the memory.

l-144



5. OPERATION

PMC I/O screen

' PMC I / O

PROGRAM MONIT STOP-

CHANNEL = 1

DEVICE

= M-CARD

;;i~iJJ ~;I;$&&= WRITE

DATA

KI ND = LADDER

FI LE NO. =

( #NAME )

[ .EXEC

1[CANCEL

[WRI TE

1 E

READ

1 [COMPARI

The fol l ow ngperati ons re performed on thepersonal computer side.


Select

Select

Select

[l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

[M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu. (See Fig.

5. 6. 7. 1

a).)

[READ]

(read (programmer C- memory card)). (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b).)

Convert the PMC programs output to a memory card in step @ from memory card format

to ROM format by specifying the following items and running the utility.

Name of the memory card file

Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory

card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.


Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data after

1.~3C

FROM K )

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

READ (PROCRAMER - > Memory Card

Memory Card FLE NAME :

DYSAMFLE #RF

(Specfy the MEMORY CARD drive)

R& FORMAT FLE NAME

:

AYDATAYSMPE #EX

Fig. 5.6.7.2 (a) Input/Output (from MC) Screen

conversion.

1 -

145



5. OPERATION

0 Discompile the ROM format file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able to

be edited on the personal computer.

5.6.7.3

Memory card input/output function (PMC-RAl) for the PMC of the

CNC (L/R) with loader control

This function writes a loader control sequence program to, or reads it from, the FANUC Series 16-

MODEL B with loader control. The loader control sequence program can be edited by specifying

the model as PMC-RAl.

(1)

Writing (programmer - > memory card)

To write an L/R sequence program to a memory card, use the F8 key (L/R).

(The operations other than input/output with the memory card (such as editing) are the same

as those for the conventional PMC-RAl.)

[Operation]

(2)


Select [INOUT] (input output) from the main menu.

Select [M-CARD] (memory card) from the input/output menu.

Specify the names of the desired ROM format file and memory card file. (The memory

card filename is specified in the form of memory card drive + filename.)

Write to the memory card using the F8 key (L/R).

WRTE fPROCRME% - > Memory Card

ROM FORMAT FLE NAME

:

AYDATAYSMPLE XEX

Memory Card FLE NAME

:

DYSAMPLE XBF

(Specfy the MEWRY CARD drive)

Fig. 5.6.7.3 Input/Output (to MC) Screen (model supporting loader control)

Reading (programmer < - memory card)

To read the loader control sequence program from the memory card, use the same operating

procedure as for the conventional PMC-RAl.

1-146



5. OPERATION

56.8 Handy File + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

If a ROM format file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output

to a 3.6” floppy disk (MS-DOS format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC

via a Handy File interface connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

5.6.8.1

PMC program transfer from the personal computer to

the CNC

[Operation]

Compile a source program, and create a ROM format file.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

Select [FDCAS] (FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File) from

menu. (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)

the input/output

Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File)).

IKI iFDCASi

&B

\\\m-

Fl

KEY : WRTE (PAOCRAhSA --> Handy Fle)

F2 KEY : READ (PROCRMMR <- Handy Fle)

FO KEY

:

ESD

Fig. 5.6.8.1 (a) FDCAS Input/Output Screen

Convert the ROM format file to Handy File format by specifying the following items and

running the utility.


Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.

Name of the Handy File format file

Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy

File) to be generated by conversion, and the 3.5” disk drive to which the file is output;

5” floppy disk cannot be used.

l - 147



5. OPERATION

' ARI TE PROCRAMER - > HandyFi l e:

Fi M( ORMT FI LE t&ME

:

A: YDATACSAAl NE. PEX

HandyFi l e FI LE i AME

: C: YSAl l F ' LE. : SF

: Speci f he f l oppydi sk dr i ve

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

@ Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5” floppy disk generated in step @ into

the Handy File.

5.6.8.2 PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation]

Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program to a 3.5” floppy disk (MS-

DOS format).

The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.

Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main unit.

Select [FDCAS] (FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy

menu.

Select [READ] (read (programmer <- FLOPPY CASSETTE

(See Fig. 5. 6. 7. 1(a).)

File) from the input/output

ADAPTER & Handy File)).

Convert the PMC program on a 3.5” floppy disk (Handy File format) generated in step 0 to

ROM format by specifying the following items and running the utility.

Name of the Handy File format file

Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5” floppy disk drive where the

floppy disk is inserted.


Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data generated by conversion.

1-148



5. OPERATION

5.6.9

I. 0 ; FROM FDCAS i

:::wc-Rc3 _\\ 1 ~,@ux%wm

.: ‘~_ \\\,\...._ 1

READ (PROCRAWR < Handy Fle

Handy Fle FLE WAME

: CYSAWLE :SF

(Specfy the floppy dsk drive

ROM FORUAT FLE NAUE

: AYDATAYSAWLE PEX

Fig. 5.6.8.2 (a) Input/Output (from FDCAS) Screen

Discompile the ROM format file after conversion, and the resultant file will become able to

be edited on the personal computer.

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER + 3.5” floppy disk (P-G format)

If a ROM format file compiled on a personal computer is converted to Handy File format and output

to a 3.6” floppy disk (P-G format), the PMC program can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER connected to the CNC. This operation can be reversed.

(Caution]

There are two types of adapters for access to 3.5” floppy disk drives.

Name

Specification number

Accessible floppy disk type

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

Al 38-01

SO BOO1

2HD

CASSETTE ADAPTER3

A13B-0131-8001 2DD

This function uses “P-G <- > MS-DOS format conversion” supported by FLPGMS. FLPGMS

does not support 200 floppy disks, so CASSETTE ADAPTER 3 cannot be used with FLPGMS.

Similarly, this function cannot be used on the IBM PC/AT, because it does not support “P-G <->

MS-DOS format conversion.”

1-149



5. OPERATION

5.7 Mnemonic Editing

57.1 Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

[Operation]

Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 5.7.1(a)).

1WWW2SRCtXV3BAT&H 4 "5"

6 , ,V' . y,y:- < 8" ".; , , "v ', , OFJ @

Fig. 5.7.1(a) Mnemonic Menu Screen

Select [MNECNV] (conversion to mnemonic).

The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 57.1 (b)).

1) SOURCEPROCRAMNAFe:

2) HMNI C FI LE NW

3' ( ONEJ ; DATA KI ND SELECTION

:

[ ; ; fWM PARAWTER

( 3 : SYmOL&CU)I Eah"T

4) MODE

: FUR P-G

l-150



5. OPERATION

@ Specify the following items:

Source program name

Specify the name of the source program to be converted. Up to eight characters can

be specified. Never specify an extension for the name.

Mnemonic file name

Specify the name of the mnemonic file to which a source program is converted. Up to

40 characters can be specified.

Data conversion selection

Specify data files subject to conversion.

All data files can be specified or specific data

files can be selected.

Mode (setting item selection)

Specify setting items.

Select items from the table below, using the < t > and

< + > keys.

FOR

P-G

-

P-G output format data is converted.

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2).

Japanese

Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.

anguage

Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

:omment (Note)

format (Note 3).

WLL OPTION

-

Comment data, which may include kanji characters, is converted.

Data including address symbols and comments, and function instruction

names treated as comments is converted.

Data including all instruction sections, operand sections, and comment

sections is converted.


format (Note 3).

_ABELI Data is converted and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction

SUB-PROGRAM

(JMPB, JMPC, CALL. SP, or another instruction) used in a sub-program is

highlighted. The step number of the converted mnemonic data does not

agree with other setting. (The function instruction section used in the sub-

program does not agree with the other setting.)


format (Note 3).

(Note 1)

The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected

on an IBM PC/AT.

(Note 2, 3)

Format displayed on the code or Japanese-language input mode screen during

message editing.

@ Select (EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

ci3 Source program is converted to a mnemonic file.

1 - 151



5. OPERATION

@I An error message is displayed if <RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The mnemonic

conversion screen appears when -z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted to a source

program that can be edited with the personal computer version of FAPT LADDER.

[Operation]

0 Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

0 The mnemonic menu screen appears.

@ Select (SRCCNV] (conversion to a source program).

@I The source program conversion screen appears (Fig. 5.7.2).

: FoRP4

Fig. 5.7.2 Source Program Conversion Screen

61 Specify the following items:

Mnemonic file name

Specify the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be

specified.

0 Source program name

Specify the name of the source program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.

Up to eight characters can be specified. Never specify an extension for the name.

Mode (setting item selection)

Specify setting items. Select items from the table below using the < + > and < + >

keys.

(Note)

The item specifying Japanese language comment conversion cannot be selected on an

IBM PC/AT.

1-152



5. OPERATION

@ Select [EXEC] upon completion of item specification.

(?J Mnemonic file is converted to a source program.

@ An error message is displayed if c RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The source

program conversion screen appears when < SPACE > is pressed after conversion.

5.7.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted to a source

program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format.

(a) Identification code

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification codes that each begin with %.

ID code Description

O/o@A Beginning of ALL-format data

%@E End of ALL-format data

%@O to 5

Beginning of unit-format data

% only End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.

Unit-format data

L

PMC model

M N NAKIA P

Parameter

Title

Symbol & comment

Ladder

Message

l/O module

%@O

~ %@l

%@2

O/o@3

TO@0

%@l

%@2

“/0@3

%@4

% @O

%@l

% @2

O/o@3

%@4

% @5

% @O

%@l

%@2

%@3

(b)

Linefeed code

Control character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is

ignored.

(c)

Reserved symbols

0

r J

This special character is reserved for use in ladder data.

A semicolon is used in the ladder data section to separate ladder data from a

comment. Characters that follow a semicolon are treated as a comment.

When a mnemonic file is converted back to a source program, a semicolon and

a comment that follows it are not generated.

I series/PAl/PA3/QC/NB/NB:

%

@O

%@l

% @2

% @3

% @4

O/o@5

1-153



5. OPERATION

0 r j

This special character is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data.

A coton is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder

data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number.

A colon is also used in the I/O module data section to separate a channel

number from 110 module data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a

channel number.

In case of PMCRB4 RB4(STEP SEQ/RB5. RBG)/RC4’RC4(STEP

below format.

SEQ NB2), mnemonic file has

%@A

r ID code (See 10.1)

%@2-c

R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER

II

Description of symbol

$1 ‘KEEP POWk?-ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’ and comment (See 10.3)

R0200.1 UNIT 3 ACT

$1 ‘S’POWER$$’ -

‘KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$’ ON’

R0300.0

- Control character

$1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’

‘KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON’

(See 10.2)

PO008 OPEN FRONT

$1 ‘OPEN FRONT COVER’

LO100 INITIALIZE

$1 ”

‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

%

% @3

RD R1OO1.O

OR R120.3

AND R1000.2

WRT Y2000.4

(’

Net comment is written in here. Any characters

you enter by using personal computer is permitted.

3

1

escription of net

comment (See 10.4(l))

RD R1OO1.O

AND R1000.2

WRT Y23.4

(*SP 3

Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

RD R1O1.O

(See 10.4(2))

OR R123.4

AND R100.2

WRT Y200.4

%

‘y

I

%E

Note)

A mnemonic file converted with version 08.1 or earlier is able to be converted to source

program with version 08.4 or later.

But a mnemonic file converted with version 08.4 or later is not able to be converted to

source program with version 08.1 or earlier.

1-154



5. OPERATION

1)

ID code

The ID code for symbol and comment data has been changed to “%@2-C”.

Another ID codes are not changed.

Data kind

RB4’RB4 (STEP)‘RC4;RC4 (STEP)

Ver. 08.4 or later

Ver. 08.1 or earlier

System parameter

%

@O

% @O

Title

%@l

%@l

Symbol/comment

%@2-c

% @2

Ladder

% @a

%@3

Message

% @4

% (94

l/O module

% @5

% @5

Note)

For PMC-RB5 RBG/NB2 is Ver 08.5 or later.

2)

3)

Control character

The dollar character “S” is used as control character in the mnemonic file. Every dollar

character in the sentence must be described as “$$” in the mnemonic file.

Symbol and comment data

(1)

(2)

Description of address and symbol

Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.

Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe after address data

with blank character or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter.

1 R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER

--

Description of relay comment and coil comment

Describe the relay comment and coil comment after address defined in (1).

The first string between two single quotation marks after mark “$1” is relay comment. And

next string between two single quotation marks is coil comment.

1 $1 ‘KEEP POWER ON’ ‘KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON’

Blank character or horizontal tabulation character

Mark of comment data line (only ‘$1’)

1-155



5. OPERATION

When relay comment is not used, a part of relay comment must be described by double

single quotation marks.

I $1 ”

‘INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE’

Note) Every single quotation mark in the relay comment and coil comment string must be

described as “$” +

‘*“I in the mnemonic file.

4) Ladder data

(1) Description of net comment

The net comment data is specified by ‘(* and ‘3’ characters.

(2) Designation of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

Designation of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described as “$P” or “$p” in

the mnemonic file.

Characters

I

Means

$P or $p

Designation of new page

(for ladder diagram printing)

1-156



5. OPERATION

5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files

(a)

Parameter

0

PMC-L

8

ce

0 1

1

4001

2

01

3

501

4

301

5

101

6

501

81

tEoB1

(single-format)

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

D address size

Whether an operator’s panel is used

Size of the area

used for timers

Size of the area used for counters

4-digit BCD display address


PMC-M M (l/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC)

se 0 1

1

3901

2

11

3

2001

4

401

5

201

6

101

7

1501

8

11

9

11

01

IEOBI

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

B.

9.

D address size


Size of the area used for timers

Size of the area used for counters



Ladder execution time

Ladder execution period

(0 to 400 bytes)

(1:

YES, 0: NO)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(1: YES, 0: NO)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(0 to 400 bytes)

(100 to 200%)

(0: 16 ms, 1: 8

ms)

Division/non-division method

(0: Division, 1: Non-division)

(Note)

The parameter in Item 8 above (ladder execution period) is not applicable to PMC-M

(MMC).

0 PMC-P

ae 01

1

20481

%l

IEOBI

1. D address size

(0 to 2048 bytes)

1-157



5. OPERATION

@ PMC-N/N (VO LINKRB4)

%@ 0 1

1 4040~

2 BINARY1

3 SOS-

4 PC-N1

5 8000001

6 581

7 0001

8 8100001

9 NOi

10 041

sl

[EOBI

m

MC Series

Counter data type

PASCAL execution time

Setting not required

PASCAL TCB start address

(4040: N, 4045: N (I ‘0 LINK))

(Binary or BCD)

(0 to 100%)

(PC-N (fixed))

(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))

PASCAL PMC screen processing time ratio

(0 to 99%)

Ladder execution time (000 to 050%) (Note)

PASCAL data start address (0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))

Level-3 synchronization (NO: Asynchronous, YES: Synchronous)

10. PMC edition

(PMC edition (2-digit))

(Note) Set a value subtracting 100 from an actual value for the

"7. adder execution time”.

(Example) When an actual value desired for the ladder execution

time is 125%, set 025

to that setting.

PMC-RAl RA2IPAl /PA3’PB4RB4 (STED)/RB5/RBG

%@

0

1

2 BINARY1

2.

3 No1 3.

4 PMC- RAll 14.

81

[EOBI

(Note) When specifying

YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify

the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as

follows:

Counter data type

(Binary or BCD)


(YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model

(PMC-RAl/PMC-RA2’PMC

RB4iPMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-

PAl/PMCPA3/PMCRB5/PMCRBG)

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

1-158



5. OPERATION

@ PMCRB,‘RB2RA3’RB3

se

0 1

2

BINARY1

3 NO1

4

PMC-RB1

7

1001

9

YES1

01

[EOBI

2.

3.

4.

7.

9.

Counter data type

(Binary or BCD)

Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model

(PMC-RB, PMCRB2 or PMC-RB)


(100% (fixed))

Division/non-division method

(NO: Division, YES: Non-division)

(Note 1)

When specifying

YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),

specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image

address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

(Note 2)

The parameter in Item 9 above (division/non-division method) is not applicable to

PMCRB2/RA3/RB3.

@ PMCRCIRC3iRC4IRC4 (STEP)

%e

0 1

2 BCDS.

3

ND1

4

PMC-RCl

5

000000

7

100s.

9

NOi

81

[EoBl

Counter data type (Binary or BCD)


(YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model (PMCRCRC3 (fixed)/PMC-RC4)

Start address of language program link control statement data

(0 or 800000 o 8FFFFF

(hexadecimal))


(1 to 150%)

Division/non-division method (NO: Division, YES: Non-division)

(Note 1) When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operator’s panel is used),

specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image

address as follows:

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO5.

(Note 2)

Parameter 9 “Divisioninon-division method” is not available for PMCRC3.

1-159



5. OPERATION

@I PMC-QC/NB:NB2

%@ 0 1

2 BCDJ

3 NOS-

4 PHC-QCl

5 000000

6 501

7 1001

81

fEoB1

lb)

Title (common to all models)

%@ 11

01

MACHINE

TOOL

BUILDER

NAME 1

02

MACHINE

TOOL

NAMES

03

CNC 7

PMC

NAMES

04

PMC

PROGRAM NO.1

05

EDITION

NO.1

06

PROGRAM

DRAWING NO.1

07

DATE O

PROGRAMING1

08

PROGRAM

DESIGNED

BYi

09

ROM

WRITTEN

BY1

10

REMARKS1

el

fEOB1

(c)

Symbols and comments (common to all models)

2. Counter data type (Binary or BCD)

3. Whether an operator’s panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

4. PMC model (PMC-QCPMC-NB PMC-NB2)

5. Start address of language program link control statement data

(0 or 200000 to PFFFFF

(hexadecimal))

6. Percentage of language program execution time (1% to 99%)

7. Ladder execution time

(Always 100%)

(Note) If YES is specified in item 3 (whether an operator’s panel is used), specify the

addresses of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:

3

YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

%@ 2 1

x000.0 2PX.M START BELT CONVEYER 1

x000.1 2PY.M LIMIT SWITCH

ON1

%l

(EOBJ

l-160



5. OPERATION

@ Symbols and comments (at using the expanded symbol function)

(d)

Ladder (common to all models)

%@2-c

7

Symbol

R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER

$1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'

-

Coil Comment

Relay comment

R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT

$1 *$*P~wER$$'

*KEEP UNIT-~ $$PowER$' 0~'

R0300.0

IControl code

$1

'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP INIT- POWER ON'

PO008 OPEN-FRONT

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER'

LO100 INITIALIZE

$1 "

'INITIALIZE

OF

SEQUENCE'

- no Relay comment

%

[EOBI

0 FOR P G

--

%@ 31

RD X0.41

OR Y80.61

WRT DSOO.ll

SUB 11

RD.

NOT X3.01

SUB

4 1

21

81911

03001

SUB 21

81

[EOBI

1 -

161



5. OPERATION

8 FULL OPTION

-

%@3 1

NOOOOl: SUB

N00002: RD

SUB

N00003: RD

SUB

N00004: RD

SUB

N00005: SUB

N00006: SUB

YOOO07: SUB

VOOOOB: SUB

YOOO09: RD

DEC

WRT

300010: SUB

300011: SUB

I1

71

Pl

x0.0

68

LlOO

x0.1

73

LlOO

x0.1

65

P2

66

P2

69

LlOO

72

71

P2

RO.0

DO

21

DO.0

72

64

;

SP

;(SUBPRl

;(XADRSl

; JMPBl

;(LABELl

;(XADRS2

; JMPCl

;(LABELl

;(XADRSZ

; CALL1

;(SPlOOO

; CALLU5.

;(SPlOOO

) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1

) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl] 1

) [LABEL Looooi] 1

) [JUMPB LABEL Looooi] J

)

[LABEL Looooi] 1

)

[JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl]l

) [SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.lOOO] 1

) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOOO]J

; LBL 1

;(LABEL~

1

[LABEL LOOOO~]

1

;

SPE 1

:

-1

;

(SPlOOO ) [SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.1000

;(RADRSOO

) 1

;(DADRS04

) 1

1

;

SPE 1

; END 1

1-162



5. OPERATION

0 FULL-OPTION (at using the expanded symbol function)

%@3 1

NOOOOl: SUB

N00002: RD

SUB

N00003: RD

SUB

N00004: SUB

N00005: SUB

N00006: SUB

N00007: RD

DE

WRT

N00008: SUB

N00009: SUB

81

71

Pl

x0.0

68

LlOO

x0.1

73

LlOO

69

LlOO

72

71

P2

RO.0

DO

21

DO.0

72

64

Symbol

;

SP

[_,

Relay comment

;(SUBPRl ) "SUB PROG. N0.01" 1

; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1

L--

Coil comment

;(XADRSl ) "JUMPB LABEL Lool" l-_-1

; JMPBJ

no Comment

;(LABELl )l

; [LABEL ~ooool] 1A

no Relay comment

;(XADRSZ ) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"$

; JMPCJ

;(LABELl )l

; [LABEL ~00001

;

LBL 1

;(LABELl )1

; [LABEL LOOOOlJ1

; SPE 1

: -1

;

(SPlOOO

)

"SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l

;(RADRSOO ) 1

;(DADRSOII ) 1

1

; SPE 1

; END 1

1-163



5. OPERATION

@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

H3 1

;UBPRl SP

RD

JMPB

RD

JMPC

RD

CALL

CALLU

LABEL1 LBL

SPE 1

iPlOO0 SP

RD

DEC

WRT

SPE 1

END 1

1 1

71 ;<Pl

XADRSl :<Xo.o

LABEL1 :<LlOo

XADRSZ ;<Xo.l

LABEL1 ;<Lloo

XADRSZ ;<Xo.l

SPlOOO :<P2

SPlOOO ;<P2

;<LlOOO

;<P2

RADROO ;<RO.O

DADR04 ;<DO

21

DO.0 1

> [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1

> [JIJMPB ABEL LOOOO1]1

> [LABEL Looool] 1

> [JUMPB LABEL ~ooool] 1

> [LABEL L00001] 1

> [JUMPB LABEL Looool] 1

> [SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.looo]1

> [SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.lOoo] 1

> [LABEL Looooi] 1

> [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOoo] 1

'

1

’ 1

6) LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM (at using the expanded symbol function)

%@3 1

SUBPRl SP

RD

JMPB

RD

JMPC

LABEL1 LBL

SPE 1

SPlOOO SP

RD

DEC

WRT

SPE 1

END 1

% 1

I Address I Relay comment

SUBPRl :<Pl >. "SUB PROG. N0.01"

; [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1

r

Symbol

- Coil comment

XADRSl ;<XO.o > 'JUMPB LABEL LOOl"1

LABEL1 ;<LlOO

>l

;

[LABEL Looooi] 1

XADRS2 ;<XO.l

> "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"l

LABEL1 ;<LlOO

> [LABEL Looool] 1

;<LlOOO >1

;

[LABEL Looool] 1

;<P2 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l

RADROO ;<RO.O

' 1

DADR04 ;<DO

'

1

21

DO.0 1

1-164



5. OPERATION

(e)

Message (other than PMC-L, PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/M (MMC), PMC-P)

re 4 1

A0 0 0 2100020

ATC DOOR NOT CLOSE1

AOO.l

2101022 SPINDLE SPEED

ARRIVA

L SIGNAL

NOT

ON1

AO0.2

2100020

EDTOK KEY

SWITCR

ONi

%l

[EOBI

(f1

I/O module (other than PMC-UP)

%@ 5 1

x000

1 0 1 ID64Al

YO08 1 0 4 OD64Bl

81

[EOBI

L

(Note) The ID code depends on the model as follows:

.

%@4 :

PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC)

0

%@5 :

PMC-N/N (I/O LINK), PMC_RAl/RA2/RB/RB2/RC

1-165



5. OPERATION

5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

a) PMC-M

%@ A

1

%@0 1

1 3901

2 11

8 11

9 11

el

ee 11

01

MACH

02 MACH

09

ROM

10

REMA

sl

%@ 2 1

x000.0

x000.1

%l

%@

3

1

SUB 11

RD.

NOT

SUB

401

21

81911

03005

SUB 21

SUB

481

%l

se

4

1

x000 1

YOO8 1

%l

%@ E 1

[EOBI

INE

TOOL BUILDER

INE TOOL NAME1

WRITTEN

BYA

RKSl

NAMES

2PX.M

START BELT CONVEYER 1

2PY.M

LIMIT SWITCH

ONS.

x3.01

0 1 ID64Al

0

4

OD64Bl

1-166



5. OPERATION

PMC-N

1

%@ A 1

%@ 1

1 sosol

2 BINARY1

9 NO1

10

041

%l

%@ 11

01

MACHINE

TOOL BUILDER

02 MACHINE TOOL NAME1

NAME1

09

ROM

WRITTEN

BY1

10 REMARKS1

sl

%@ 21

x000.0 2PX.M

x000.1 2PY.M

sl

%@

3 1

SUB 11

RD. NOT K3.01

SUB

401

21

81911

DO001

SUB 21

SUB

481

%l

%@ 4 1

AOO.0 2100020

AOO.l 2101022

START BELT CONVEYER 1

LIMIT SWITCH

ON1

ATC

DOOR

NOT CLOSE1

SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVA

L SIGNAL NOT

ON1

rl

%@ 51

x000

1 0 1

ID64Al

YOO8

1 0 4

OD64Bl

%l

%@ El

tEoB1

1-167



5. OPERATION

(cl

PMC-FIB

%@

1

se

0 1

2 BCDJ.

3 NO1

7 1001

9 YES1

%l

%@11

01 MACHINE

02 MACHINE

TOOL

BUILDER

TOOL

NAME

09

ROM WRITTEN BY'

10 REMARKS1

%l

%@2 1

x000.0 ZPX.M

x000.1 ZPY.M

sl

oe

3

1

SUB 11

RD.

NOT K3.01

SUB

401

21

81911

D3001

SUB 21

SUB

481

sl

%@4 1

AOO.0 2100020

AOO.l

2101022

J

START

LIMIT

BELT CONVEYER

SWITCH 0 N 1

ATC DOOR N

SPI NDLE SP

L

SIGNAL

NOT

ONS.

%l

%@ 5 1

x000 1 0 1 ID16

YOO8 1 0 4 OD32

%l

%@ E 1

[EOBI

cl

Al

NAME1

1

OT

CLOSE1

EED

ARRIVA

l-168



5. OPERATION

(d)

PMC-RB4

%@A 1

%@O1

2 BINARY&

3 NO1

4 PMC-RB4 1

%

1

%@l1

01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1

10 REMARKS1

% 1

ae2-c 1

RO200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1

$1 'KEEP POWER ON'

'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1

R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1

$1 '$'P~wER$$'

'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'J.

RO300 0 1

$1 'KEEP POWER ON'

'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'1

PO008

OPEN-FRONT1

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1

LO100

INITIALIZE1

$1 "

'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'&

$1

$@3

1

RD RlOOl.03.

3R R120.3 1

9ND R1000.2 1

nlRT 2000.4 1

(*

Inscribe the net comment here.

Any characters

which are input with personal computer can be used.

1

Net

comment

R)

RD R1OO1.O1

9ND R1000.2 1

dRT Y23.4 1

(* SP

form feed position (in Ladder diagram)

RD

R1O1.O 1

OR R123.4 1

AND R100.21

WRT Y200.41

% 1

%@a 1

AOO 0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ

AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL

NOT ON 1

%

1

%@5

1

X000 1 0 1 IDlBC&

YO08 1 0 4 OD32Al

%

1

%@E

1-169



5. OPERATION

5.7.6 The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a

model

When using the step sequence method, mnemonic instructions cannot be coded.

The mnemonic conversion functions need following notes:

1)

2)

3)

Programming by Mnemonic instructions

A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to

create a step sequence program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER

by means of mnemonic-to-source conversion.

Source-to-Mnemonic and Mnemonic-to-Source Conversions

If source-to-mnemonic conversion is executed for a step sequence source program, only ladder

subprograms are converted to mnemonics, step sequence subprograms being ignored. If a

step sequence source program is subjected to source-to-mnemonic conversion, then to

mnemonic-to-source conversion, the original source program will not be replicated.

Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics

A program can be converted by using mnemonics, as shown below:

I PMC-RB3

, * PMCRC3

1

(STEP SEQ)

A program for the PMC-FIB4 (STEP SEC?) cannot be converted for use with the PMCRC4

(STEP SEC), because of the reason explained in Section 7.2. The program can be converted

if a ROM file is used, however. (For details of this conversion, see the description of the

decompiler.)

l-170



5. OPERATION

5.7.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

A user’s own batch file generated by editing the contents of the FLMNE.BAT file with a standard

text editor can also be executed.

Examole

1

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended and text editor VZ is activated. (In this case,

VZ must be defined in the environment variable PATH beforehand.)

[Operation ]

Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNEBAT as follows:

vz

Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic menu screen appears.

Select ([BATCH] (user batch file execution).

The following message appears:

Execute

'FLMNE.BAT'.

Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]

Specify A (Add), and specify *.HEX as the parameter.

VZ is activated and a list of files

with the extension .HEX is displayed.

To restart FAPT LADDER. terminate VZ.

I

eturn to FAPT LADDER. Hit any key

I

Press any key. The screen display

returns to the mnemonic menu screen.

Example 2

The execution of FAPT LADDER is suspended.

Then, the command processor

COMMAND.COM is activated and MS-DOS commands are enabled. Create FLMNE.BAT as

follows:

COMMAND

I

1 - 171



II APPLICATIONS

(NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)



1.

COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE

PC9801 AND IBM PG’AT

1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC

This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P-G (including the

Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable. The command for NEC PC9801 series PCs is

FLOAD98, and the command for IBM PC/ATs is FLOADAT.

Use this function to transfer the sequence program between the P-G and a personal computer if

(data exchange function) cannot be used with 3.5” floppy, for example, in a system with the P-G

provided with a 5” floppy disk drive or in a system with a personal computer not provided with a

3.5” floppy disk (1.2 Mbytes) drive.

1.1.1


(1)

Uploading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98 - [name of file for storing uploaded data] - -u (for PC9801)

FLOADAT - [name of file for storing uploaded data] - -u (for IBM PC/AT)

When a file with the same name as the file specified for receiving data already exists in the

current directory, the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

(2)

Downloading

Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.

FLOAD98

- [name of file for storing downloaded data] - -d (for PC9801)

FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing downloaded data] _ -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown above, the load commands have the following two parameters:

-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC.

-d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.

(Note) The above parameters can be specified with either lowercase or uppercase characters.

2-l




1 1.2 Communications settings

PC side

NEC PC9801 Series

baud rate:

(MS-DOS SPEED command) character length:

parity:

stop bits:

X parameter:

4800 or 9600

7 bits

even parity

2 bits

none

IBM PC/AT Series

MODE COMI: 4800,E,7,2

(PC DOS MODE command) MODE COMl:

9600,E,7,2 (for 9600 baud)

P-G side

IO NC,CNl,Fl ,F6

10 NC,CNl,Fl,F6,BRlO (for 9600 baud)

(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600. However, note that when the PC

baud rate is set to 9600, the parameter BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting

for the P-G.

(Note 2)

It is necessary to set these communications setting only for doing this operation. After

using this function, please restore the communications settings as the section 2.1

(Chapter 1).

The CN number is not fixed. For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from

CNl to CN4. For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl to CN3. However,

note that the CN number selected here must match the CN number of the IO command. Use the

cables specified in Appendix 1.

2-2




peration examde

During uploading

Operation procedure

c PC > < PG > Turn on power.

Example of input and screen contents

< PG > Enter IO command settings.

; IO C,CNl ,Fl ,FG(,BRlO)

c PC > PC9801 Series: Enter SPEED command

; (See Section 2 of Communications

settings.

i Settings)

IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE

command settings. i

< PG > Store transmission data in P-G memory.

: Press the [F2] key to select menu item

i no.2.

< PC > Execute FLOAD98. Enters waiting state.

i FLOAD98 FILE NAME -u

Execute FLOADAT. Enters waiting state. i FLOADAT FILENAME -u

i < PC > “LOADER START” is displayed.

< PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu.

i

c PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the

submenu.

3egins transmission.

i c PG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.

Completes transmission.

e PG > Returns to the menu.

i =zPC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.

( PC > The message “Operation Complete” is

i

“HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT

;

ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation. i

During downloading

Operation procedure

Example of input and screen contents

< PC > < PG > Turn on power.

< PG > Enter IO command settings.

< PC > Enter SPEED command settings.

; IO NC,CNl,(BRlO,)Fl,FG

i (See Section 2 of Communications

i Settings)

< PG > Turn on [Fl] key. Select no.2 on the

menu. Enters waiting state.

< PC > Execute FLOAD98.

Execute FLOADAT.

Begins transmission.

Completes transmission.

<PG> Returns to the menu.

=zPG > “EXECUTING” is displayed.

; FLOAD98 FILE NAME -d

; FLOADAT FILENAME -d

i <PC> “Output Start” is displayed.

< PC > The message “Operation Complete” is

: < PC > “Operation Complete” is displayed.

displayed, followed by the prompt “HIT

i

“HIT ANY KEY” is displayed.

ANY KEY”. Hit any key to end operation. i

2-3



1. COMMON OPERATIONS

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PG’AT

1 .1.3 Protocol

Durinq uploadinq

When the FLOAD98 or FLOADAT command is executed on the PC side, a communications

request is issued for the P-G and reception begins. After all data has been received, DC 3 is

sent and transmission is completed.

0 DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmission request).

8 Data is received.

Q Completion code is received and reception is completed.

@ DC 3 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent

output.

Durina downloadinq

BIOS call for input and

After the P-G issues a transmission request, the P-G enters the waiting state. FLOAD98 or

FLOADAT is activated in the PC, then transmission begins. After all data has been sent. DC 4

is sent and transmission is completed.

0 The P-G issues DC 1.

8 DC 2 code is sent to the P-G.

@ Data is sent.

@ DC 4 code is sent.

Transmission and reception both use the l-byte machine-dependent

output.

1.1.4

BUSY control

BIOS call for input and

When the transmission speed is faster than reception processing, BUSY control is performed by

issuing the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. In the PC9801 series, the X parameter in the DOS SPEED

command is set to off, which allows the application to provide support for BUSY control. In the

IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter, which effectively has the same result.

2-4




1.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system will automatically determine which of the following seven pairs of start and end codes

is used. When none of these codes are used, an error message is displayed and operation

terminates.

1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(Note)

The end codes

shown here must appear at

the beginning of a line. In

other words, strictly speaking,

a data reception end code is

actually denoted by the

sequence CR + LF + an end

code. End codes (% etc.)

appearing within comments

are ignored.

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR

(ODH) followed by LF (OAH).

(2) When a CR code (ODH) is received, it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) is received, CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended to it in that order.

1.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.

1 1

1 1

. . .-Discarded

Valid data I...

After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, DC 3 is sent for uploading or DC 4 is sent for

downloading, then the file is closed.

2-s




1 .1.8 Error detection and messages

This software detects the following four types of

errors.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

When there is an error in the command line

Error in the file name, -u. or -d.

Parameter Error

FLOAD98 FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)

When the specified file cannot be found

Output file cannot be found or file for receiving cannot be opened.

I~- ~~~

annot open output file

I

When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received

Wrong data received

When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected

or there is a definite oroblem with the end code

I

nd code error detected

This software only detects errors in the command line and in the FAPT LADDER format.

This software does not support detection of errors in the contents of FAPT LADDER data.

Messaaes

When the file name specified as the file for receiving data already exists in the current directory,

the following message is displayed.

File is exist. Over write? <Y/N >

2-6




1.1.9 Error detection and handling

1. Incorrect entry found in the command line.

2. Specified file cannot be opened.

3. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The following causes can be considered for the above errors:

0 The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).

0 The start code has been omitted (%@‘, where is A or 0 to 5. was omitted).

Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.

Garbage data exists between each unit of data.

The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.

When any of the above errors is detected, the current operation is canceled.

During downloading, if an error is detected on the PC, the system will return to the DOS

screen. At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return it to the

menu screen.

4. Others

When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted

(When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)

When data transfer is interrupted during uploading, the system will enter a waiting state until

data transfer is restarted. (To interrupt the waiting state, press cCTRl_> + <C >).

When data transfer is interrupted during downloading, the data becomes corrupt and data

transfer must be started over from the beginning.

2-7



1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

1.2

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to

another type of it.

1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing

On the following

parameter of the

However, format

different.

PMC type, it is possible to edit the different PMC type data by changing system

mnemonic data.

of the system parameter, usable functional instructions and range of address are

1~

CNC TYPE

I

PMC TYPE

FS16f 18-T/M

PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB YRB6~RC/RC3/RC4

Power Mate-MODEL D

PMC-PA1 /PA3

(1)

(2)

(3)

[Example: PMC-RB + PMC-RC3]

Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert the original source program to mnemonic file.

Change the system parameter of the mnemonic fife to PMCRC3 with a standard text editor.

Set the PMC type to PMC-RC3 on FAPT LADDER system and convert the mnemonic

file(+(2)) to source program.

Original file (PMC-RB)

%@A

%@O

2 ECD

3 NO

4 PMC-RB

7 100

9 YES

%

%@l

01 ABC-KIKAI

02 S-DRILL

%

%@5

X000 1 0 1 ID16C

YO08 1 0 4 OD32A

%

%@E

Change

system parameter

b

Converted file (PMCRC3

%@A

%@O

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC-RC3

5 000000

6 50

7 100

%

%@l

01 ABC-KIKAI

02 S-DRILL

%

$65

X000 1 0 1 IDl6C

YO08 1 0 4 OD32A

8

%@E

2-8




1.2.2 Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER

FILE NAME

APPLICABLE PMCCNC TYPE

REFERENCE MATERIALS

FS()T CNV.SYM PMC-uM/M(MMC)

-+ PMC-RAl iRA2IRA3IRB FANUC PMC

-

(FSO-T)

/RB2’RB3’RB4’RB5’ PROGRAMMING MANUAL

RBG/RC/RC3/RC4

(FS16/18-T)

(LADDER LANGUAGE)

B-61 863E

FSOM CNV.SYM PMC-UM/M(MMC) + PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB

-

(FSO-M)

/RB2/RB3 RB4/RB5/

RBG/RC/RCB/RC4

(FS16/18-M)

PM-C_CNV.SYM PMC-P + PAllPA

(Power Mate

(Power Mate

-MODEL C)

-MODEL D)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Set PMC type to PMC-P, and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.)

Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit

mode without editing the ladder program.

Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (+B.)

Quit FAPT LADDER, and activate any standard text editor.

(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.)

Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file

(PM-C.CNV). (+C.)

(6)

Replace the ladder data of mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of the original

mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.)

(7)

Complete the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER.

(8)

Set PMC type to PMC-PAl, and convert the mnemonic file@) to source program.

(3)

Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data.

(Note)

The converter file is stored in the directory APPENDIX of module floppy disk.

[Example: PMC-P + PMC-PA11

2-9



A. Original file


(PMC-P)

%@A

%@O

1 2048

%

be1

B

b@2

b

b@3

?D

X21.4

iRT G121.4

tD.NOT X22.3

fRT.NOT 6122.3

:UB 1

IUB 2

fRT 6121.4

D.NOT X22.3

rRT.NOT 6122.3

UB 1

UB 2

@E

Convert file

PM-C CNV.SYM

-

%@2

60004.3 G68.3

60005.0 695.0

60005.2 695.2

60005.3 G95.3

60005.6 G83.7

G0006.2 675.2

60006.4 674.4

60007.2 G68.2

G0007.5 684.5

X1027.4 X23.4

X1027.5 X23.5

X1027.6 X23.6

X1027.7 X23.7

I$-

c

D. insertion ,-

B. Converted file

(PMC-PAl)

%@A

%@O

2 BINARY

3 NO

4 PMC-PA1

%

eel

%

se2

b

ae3

b

se4

b

se5

b

b@E

2-10




1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module data) in a sequence

program can be used for another sequence program, by the following method.

The range of addresses used varies from one model to another. They may have to be modified.

Refer to the programming manual of the respective models.

[Example : Using the symbols & comment data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A

%@O

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC-RB

7 100

9 YES

%

eel

%@2

x000.0 2PX.M

x000.1 2PY.M

%@A

%@O

2 BCD

3 NO

4 PMC-RC3

5 000000

6 50

7 100

9 YES

%

%@l

-

X000.0 ZPX.M

X000.1 ZPY.M

1.3 Standard Symbol Data

When a mnemonic file and the standard symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the

standard symbol name provided by FANUC.

CNC TYPE

DATA FILE NAME

FS16/18-T F16&F18-T.SYM

FS16/18-M FlG&F18-M.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL D

PM-D.SYM

Power Mate-MODEL H PM-H.SYM

(Note) The standard symbol data is stored in the directory APPENDIX.

2-11




1.4 Changing Printer Output Format

Each parameter file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially available text editor so

that the output format shown in each of the following frames can be changed.

1 Diagram output %

L

-AMROFTRP. DAT

1. Change the paper

selection name

2. Set the top margin

3. Set the net interval

4. Set the printer model and

paw

-CROSSING. DAT

(Setting the cross-reference

list output format)

8. Set the output format

guidance information

9. Set the output information

10. Specify the output format

11. Set the read/write coil

guidance information

12. Specify the linefeed

13. Specify the page break

-PR201-10 . INF -

PR201-15 . INF

PR201-A4 . INF

PRlO-A . INF

PRlS-A . INF

PRA4-A . INF

ESC-P-10 . INF

ESC-P-15 . INF

ESCPl O-A. INF

ESCPl5-A. INF

-FANUC-10. INF -

5. Set the line spacing

6. Set the left margin

7. Set the title of printout

For these parameter files, do not change any item not described here.

2-12




FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

- Print format

lo-inch/ASCII

.

.

*lo-inch/graphic

15-inch/ASCII

15-inch/graphic

A4 portrait/ASCII

A4 portrait/graphic

.

.:,‘~:.:,~~:-:

- ,:gq:

5

$ > ,. : :

.,...

6”:~:~7~8~,.‘g~~10 ~j$.#)..

;

‘,.y “F

.((.,.,,...,._._.

,,..

:.’

:.......) .:

b-1 ‘i

.:

I-

A. SETUP screen (diaqram output)

:’:

:’

:

:

:

:.

:’

:’

.*.

:

:

:, ...:..

:... , . ::.,~,,.,.... .,>,,:

., .‘. ..:.. >:

#PAPER=lO-G

: flO-A=lO-inch/ASCII

i

LENGTHL=ll

i LENGTH=11

:

WIDTHL=lO

:

WIDTH=10

;

PTCHL=lS/lZO

: LI

: z

b-2’

LEFTMGL=O

LEFTWG=O

TOPMGL=O

TOPMG=O

LCNTL=4

_FI

LE+-ij

O_FILE;PRTDAT.DMP

# ND,:'

#lQ'G=lO-inch/graphic

LENGTHL=ll

LENGTH=11

WIDTHL=lO

WIDTH=10

PTCHL=lS/lZO

LEFTMGL=O

LEFTWG=O

TOPMGL=O

TOPMG=O

/

B. AMROFTRP.DAT file

C-l. lNF files selectable at #l O-A

jindicated aoainst a white backaround)

C-2. lNF files selectable at #10-G

lindicated aaainst a white backaround)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._......

(Example) If lo-inch/graphic is selected in A:

0 In 8, setting b-2 is valid.

@ In C-2, a setting of PR201-lO.INF is alid.

i

. . . . .“...........‘......................................................................

2-13




FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format

Name of file to be

edited

9MROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

#l O-A = lo-inch ASCII

#l O-G = 1O-inch graphic

#15-A = 15inch/ASCII

#15-G = 15-inch/graphic

#A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII

#A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

Settings

Arbitrary character string consisting of

up to 30 half-size (or

15

full-size)

characters

(Note)

#A4L-A = and #A4L-G = are unavailable in the IBM PC/AT system.

1.4.2 Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

AMROFTRP.DAT TOPMGL = 0

TOPMG = 0

(for each form)

Decimal number

1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be

changed in the manner shown below.

00001 00006

YO.0 YO.1 YO.7

YO.2

.00006

00001 00008

NO0003

C

NO0004

D

NO0005

E

II II

YO.7 YO.0

00001 0006

YO.0

YO.7 YO.1

0006

00001

YO.0

YO.1

YO.7 YO.2

00006 00001 00008

When LCNTL = 4

2-14

When LCNTL = 5



1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT

File edited Modifications

Settings

AMROFTRP.DAT

LCNTL = 4

I

Specify either 4 or 5

(Set for each sheet)

1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper selection.

PR201 is not usable in the IBM system.

Name of file

Point of

lNF that can be

to be edited

Printer name

change

set

Print paper type/print mode

AMROFTRP. #l O-A PRlO_A .INF PR201 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

DAT : PR201_10 .INF PR201

1O-inch continuous form/graphic

C;FILE =

ESCPlO_A.INF VP1000

1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

ESC_P_lO .

INF VP1 000

1 O-inch continuous form/graphic

FANUC_10. INF FANUC printer

1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

#10-G

PRlO_A

.INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/ASCII

.

PR201_10 .INF PR201 1O-inch continuous form/graphic

C.-FILE =

ESCPlO_A. INF VP1 000 1 O-inch continuous form/ASCII

ESC P lO.INF VP1000

FAN%zlO. INF FANUC printer

1O-inch continuous form/graphic

lo-inch continuous form/ASCII

#15-A

PR 15-A .INF PR201

PR201_15 .INF PR201

C-FILE =

ESCP15 A. INF VP1000

ESC_P_i5. INF VP1 000

#15-G

PRlS_A

.INF PR201

PR201_15 .INF PR201

C;FILE =

ESCPIS A.INF VP1000

ESC P 15.INF VP10001

#A4L-A PRA4_A .INF PR201

: (Note) PR201_A4 .INF PR201

C;FILE =

15inch continuous form/ASCII

15-inch continuous form/graphic

15-inch continuous form/ASCII






A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

#A4L-G PRA4_A .INF PR201

: (Note) PR201_A4 .lNF PR201

C;FILE =

A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic

(Note)

This item is not supported in the IBM system.

2-15




1.4.5 Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the

one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

INF LPI

(H) (1 B) (C) (120)

;

(H) (1 B) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;

LDRLPI (H) (1 B) (C) (T15)

;

(H) (1B) (C) (Tedecimal number >) ;

1.4.6 Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the

one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

I

ame of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

1

MARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO)

I

H) (1B) (C) (LKdecimal number>)

;

2-16



1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC,‘AT

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

When ‘1’ is

selected as

the printout

paper

When ‘2’ is

selected as

the printout

paper

When ‘3’ is

selected as

the printout

paper

#PAPER = 10-G

L #10-A= 10 inch/ASCII

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

WIOTHL = 10

WIDTH = 10

PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83

LINES = 55

RATIOL = 2/3

RATIO = 2/3

GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0

TOPMGL = 0

* TOPMG = 0

* LCNTL =

4

L C

FILE = PRlO AJNF

O-FILE = PRTtiAT.DMP

&ND

L #10-G = 10 inch/graphic

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

;/w&i’ ; A0

PITCHL: 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83

LINES = 55

RATIOL = 2/3

RATIO = 213

GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0

TOPMGL = 0

. TOPMG = 0

+ LCNTL = 4

* C-FILE = PR20l_lO.INF

OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP

+ #I 5-A = 15 inch/ASCII

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = 15

WIDTH = 15

PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83

LINES = 55

RATIOL = 213

RATIO = 213

GRAMODL = 16

GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 1

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0

+ TOPMGL = 0

+ TOPMG = 0

+ LCNTL = 4

. C-FILE = PRl S_A.INF

OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP

*#15-G-15 inch

Changing the types of

printout paper

The name is changed from

*

1:lO inch’ to ‘l:NEC 10’.

see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.)

Changing the upper margin

(The upper margin is set to )

5 characters.)

Changing the types of

printout paper

(The name is changed from

*

‘2:15 inch’ to ‘2:EPSON 10’.

See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)

Changing the type of printer

(The printer is changed to

)

EPSON VP1000 and the paper

is changed to IO-inch forms.)

Changing the spacing between

:he LADDER nets

:The net spacing for the

*

-ADDER diagram is widened.)

#PAPER = I O-G

#lo-A=NEC 10

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = 10

WIDTH- 10.

PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

uw:L ;E”

RATIO; = 2/3

RATIO = 213

GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0

;c$w’-=,5

LCNTL =

4

C-FILE = PRlO_A.INF

2EFlkE * PRTDAT.DMP

#l O-G = EPSON 10

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = 10

WIDTH = 10

PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

LINESL = 83

LINES = 55

RATIOL = 2/3

RATIO - 2M

GRAMODL = 14

GRAMOD = 16

ANKMODL = 0

ANKMOD = 1

LEFTMGL = 0

LEFTWG = 0

TOPMGL = 0

ym& ‘;40

C-FILE :ESCPlO A.INF

fEF&E = PRTDAf.DMP

115-A = 15 inch/ASCII

LENGTHL = 11

LENGTH = 11

WIDTHL = 15

WIDTH = 15

PITCHL = 15/l 20

PITCH = 20/l 20

#L ;k

RATIO; = 2/3

RATIO = 2M

GRAMODL = 16

GRAMOD = 16

;;EIg;L 7 1

LEFTMGLZ 0

LEFTWG = 0

TOPMGL = 0

TbPMb = 0

LCNTL = 5

C FILE = PR15 A.INF

O-FILE = [email protected]

#END

*#15-G--15 inch

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

2-17



1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE

PC9801 AND

IBM PC/AT

Environment settings for diagram printout - example 2 (settings in fife PR201_1O.INF)

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

. .

.

.

PRZOlH3 CNTINF {

CRLF

FORMF

CPI

CANCEL

LDRCP I

*

LPI

H) W) C) T2D);

*

LDRLP I

H) w C) Tl5) ;

*

LMARGIN

H)WW) LDDD);

RMARGIN

H) W C) t/D781 ;

LDRCHAR H) 18) C) 50014);

JPNSET

HwB)ww;

JPNRESET

H) W W H) ;

1

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Setting the spacing

I I

Setting the left margin

between lines

(Left margin is set to 5

(Line spacing is set to 25.)

characters.)

PRZOlH3

CNTI NF (

CRLF

W(OD, OA);

FORMF

CANCEL

yw{:

CPI

OWhH);

LDRCP I

H) 1B) C) (Q ;

LPI

H)W)WT25);

LORLP I HWWC) Tl5);

LMARGIN

H) 1B) C) LOD5) ;

RMARGIN

H) 18) C) /078);

LORCHAR

H) 16) C)

(50014);

JPNSET

H) W) w K);

JPNRESET

H) W C) H);

(Note) An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modified.

2-18



1.

COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT

1.4.7 Setting the

title of printout

This item can change

the title of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the one

specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Vame of file to be

edited

:INF

Point of change

~~

-T

Settings

SYS-TITLE

(C) (” System parameter “) ;

CMT-TITLE

(C) (” Symbol & comment ““‘) ;

LAD-TITLE

(C) (* Ladder diagram “) ;

IO-TITLE

(C) (* I 0 module data “) ;

MSG-TITLE

(C) (” Message data 7 ;

TIT-TITLE

(C) (” Title data 7 ;

CRS-TITLE

(C) (” Cross-reference “) ;

BIT-TITLE

(C) (” Bit address map T ;

LS-TITLE

(C) (- List file 7 :

(C) (<any character string consisting

of up to 60 half-size (or 30 full-size)

characters > ) ;

(Note) Half-size katakana characters cannot be used.

1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

This item can specify characters to be output as guidance information to be output during cross-

reference listing. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as

guidance information.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change Settings

CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE = Any character string consisting of up

to 19 bytes

2-19




1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference information. If both

step and net numbers are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. In the

CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid as cross-reference

information.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF =

STEP-INF =

When only the net number is output:

NET-INT = 1

STEP-INF = 0

When only the step number is output:

NET-INT = 0

STEP-INF = 1

When the net and step numbers are

output in the stated sequence:

NET-INT = 1

STEP-INF = 2

When the step and net numbers are

output in the stated sequence:

NET-INT = 2

STEP-INF = 1

1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference list output format

This item enables a character string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net numbers. In

the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change Settings

CROSSINF.DAT 1 FORM =

I

Character string + ‘%s’

(Note) Only letters in lowercase are valid as ‘%s’.

Z-20




1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment about coil attributes.

In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Vame of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

XOSSINF.DAT

READ = Character string consisting of up to

WRITE =

13 bytes.

When coils are indicated using

graphic symbols, specify as shown

below, and select “graphic” as the

diagram output format.

READ = -I I- -l/l- :

READ = -I I- -l/l-

:

READ =

-I I- :

READ =

-I I- :

WRITE = -()- -(/)-

:

WRITE = -()-

:

1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between addresses.

In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be

edited

Point of change

CROSSINF.DAT 1 NL =

I

Decimal number

(Note)

In this case, space lines as many as the specified value plus 1 are inserted between

addresses. (If 0 is specified as the linefeed count, no space line is inserted between

addresses.)

1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with

no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

I

ame of file to be

edited

Point of change

Settings

:ROSSINF.DAT FF = ‘0’ = the page is not advanced

‘1’ = the page is advanced

2-21




1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance

A desired character string can be output as guidance when the cross reference list is printed. In

the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is

valid.

File edited

I

Modifications

I

Settings

CROSSINF.DAT

GUIDE =

Desired character string of up to 19

bvtes

1.4.15 Setting the output information

As the cross reference output information, step numbers, net numbers, or both can be output.

When both step and net numbers are output, the order in which they are printed can be specified.

In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is

valid.

File edited

CROSSINF.DAT

Modifications

NET-INF =

STEP-INF =

Settings

Only net numbers are output.

NET-INF = 1

STEP-INF = 0

Only step numbers are output.

NET-INF = 0

STEP-INF = 1

Net numbers and step numbers are

output in that order.

NET-INF = 1

STEP-INF = 2

Step numbers and net numbers are

output in that order.

NET-INF = 2

STEP-INF = 1

1.4.16 Setting the output format

A character string can be printed in front of each step or net number. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,

data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

File edited

1

Modifications

I

Settings

CROSSINF.DAT

I

FORM =

I

Character string + ‘%s’

(Note)

With ‘%s,” only the lowercase letter s is valid.

2-22




1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance

A comment about each coil attribute can be specified. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line

beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

File edited

CROSSINF.DAT

Modifications

READ =

WRITE =

Settings

Character string of up to

13

bytes.

To print a coil with graphic

characters, specify as follows and

select graphic diagram output.

READ=- 1 I- -I/j-:

READ=-II- -I/I-:

READ= -1 I- :

READ= -I I- :

WRITE = -()- -(I)- :

WRITE = -()- :

(Note)

With ‘%s,’ only the lowercase letter s is valid.

1.4.18 Setting line feed

Blank lines can be inserted between the data of different addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,

data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

-1

File edited

Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT NL =

Decimal value

(Note)

Blank lines of the specified number plus one are inserted between the data of different

address types. (If zero is specified as the line feed value, no blank lines are inserted.)

1.4.19 Setting form feed

File edited

Modifications Settings

CROSSINF.DAT FF =

‘0’ = Form feed is executed.

‘1’ = Form feed is not executed.

The printing of the data of each address type can be started on a new page.

In the

CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line beginning with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is valid.

2-23




Environment settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

:

GUIDEsSTEP No./NET No.

NET-INF=2

STEP-INF-1

FROM=S%s/N%s

READ--I I- -I/I- :

WRITE=-()- -(/)- :

NL=l

FF=O

;

0 Sample cross reference output

6

1 [A:YFLADDER4(SAMPLE]

***

Address

x0.0

-II-Yl+ :

x0.1

-It-+ :

YO.0

U-Q-:

RO.0

-Ii-++ :

Cross reference ***

Symbol Comment

S00045 N00009

SOOO88/NOOO20

s00050/N00010

S00077/N00029

S00045/N00009

S00009/N00003

S00022/N00010

S00047/N00019

SOOOO2/N00001

SOOO49/NOOO12

SOOO94/NOOO2

SOOO54/NOOOl2

SOO128/NOOO62

SOOOl2/NOOOO8

S00024/N00012

S00074/N00032

PAGE 1

STEP NO./NET No.

S00053/N00013

SO0059/N00015

S00256/N00098

S00014/N00009

S00033/N00015

S00079/N00035

S00082/N00017

S00065/N00017

Double writing

SOOOl5/NOOOlO

S00045/N00017

2-24




Environment settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file)

Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT file

GUIDE-Step

umber

NET-INF=O

STEP-INF=l

FROM=S$s

READ=read

WRITE=Write

NL-0

FF=O

:

0 Sample cross reference output

[A:YFLADDERYSAMPLE]

**

Cross reference *

PAGE 1

Step number

Address Symbol Comment

x0.0

Read

: SO0045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094

x0.1

Read

:

SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077

YO.0

Double writing

Write

:

SO0045 SO0128 SO0256

RO.0

Read

: SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045

so0047 so0074 so0079

Write

: soooo2

2-25



III. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS



3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

1.

1.1

The

OVERVIEW

What is a Step Sequence ?

step sequence is one method for programming the sequence control governed by a

programmable controller. This method features the direct representation of the control flow on a

flow chart. Each block of processing is described as a subprogram, using the ladder method.

Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand visualized flow of the processes and is well-suited to

the control of entire processes.

For details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.

”

FANUC PMC-MODEL PA1 /PA3/RAl /FWWtA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4~NB/NB2

PROGRAMMING MANUAL(LADDER LANGUAGE) B-61863/06”

1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method

The programming with step sequence method is supported by Fapt ladder, not but by

editing function on FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4 RB6/RC4/NB2.

Setting a model in Fapt ladder decides which method, step sequence or ladder, is used.

1.3 A Program Configuration Screen

the built-in

If a model that supports the step sequence function is selected, a program can be edited in units of

subprograms. To enable this, a subprogram configuration screen has been added.

This screen lists subprograms, and supports the selection and editing of a target subprogram.

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE)

RCa(STEP SEQ) [A:yFLYDATAYSFCOl]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 0 LEVEL3

i0"'tiUOO1.' PO002 0 PO004

0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007

0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014

0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017

0 PO021 0 PO022 0 PO024

0 PO025 0 PO026 POO27

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

0 PO101 0 PO202 0 JPO304

PO405 0]PO406 PO407

Sub-program : PO001

I

DELETE

I

NEW ZOOM

3-l




1.4 The Configration of a Sequence Program

A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit;

- The 1st level of ladder

- The 2nd level of ladder

- The 3rd level of ladder

- Subprograms of ladder sequence

- Subprograms of step sequence

LEVEL 1 (LADDER)

I

LEVEL 2 (LADDER)

LEVEL 3 (LADDER)

Sub Program Pl (Step Sequence)

I

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

1

I

ub Program P3 (LADDER)

I

Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

3-2




1.5 Data Flow

-PC9801*IBWPC/AT

Source program

Ladder 1st level

Mnemonic

conversion

Ladder 2nd level -

Ladder 3rd level -

Subprogram Pl

7

Subprogram P2

Compilation/Decompilation

Object code

Mnemonic program

A mnemonic program without

step sequence

I

OM format program

I

L

t

'71

Input/Output Input/Output Input/Output

Transfer data Floppy cassette

Memory card

4

4 4

- RS232C

- Handy File.

- FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER

-

Memory card

-CNC

I

v + v

1)

[PMCI

2) II/O1

3)[HOST]

1) [PMCI

2) I I/O1

3)[FDCAS]

1)

IPMCI

2) II/O1

33) [MCARD]

(Boot process also can

read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when input/output

3-3




2. SETTING A MODEL

2.1 Operation

(1)

(2)

Starting FAPT LADDER

At the MS-DOS prompt, key in FLADDER.

Displaying the initial screen

Once the system edition, copyright. and other information have been displayed, press any key.

FAPT LADDER

AOEB-92014502#EN

Ver 08.0 1994.07.22

Copyright (C) 1991 FANUC LTD

END ? (Y:END, 0THER:RESUME MENU)

(3)

Displaying the main menu

When the menu screen is displayed as shown below, press the < F7 > (SETUP) key.

MAIN MENU

Fl KEY :

F2 KEY :

F3 KEY :

F4 KEY :

F5 KEY

:

F6 KEY :

F7 KEY :

FE KEY :

F9 KEY :

FlO KEY :

[A:YFLYDATAYSFCY 1

EDIT

PRINT

COMPILE

DISCOMPILE

LINK

I/D

SETUP

MNEMONIC EDIT

UTILITY

END

EDIT

COMPIL DISCPL

I/D

SETUP UTILTY END

3-4




(4) Setting the PMC model

To use the step sequence function, select PMC-XXX(STEP SEQ or PMC-RB6 or PMC-NB2)

(model which supports the step sequence function) from the listed models.

SETUP RCQ(STEP SEQ)

PMC-RAl

PMC-RA2

.

.

PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

.

.

* PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ)

.

.

Select by cursor and hit [Enter] key.

COPY

I

I

END

3-5




3. EDITING

This section describes how to create a step sequence program.

3.1

Basic Operation

(1) Displaying the main menu

Press the < Fl > (EDIT) key.

MAIN MENU

[A:YFLYDATAYSFC%

Fl KEY :

F2 KEY :

F3 KEY :

F4 KEY :

F5 KEY :

F6 KEY :

F7 KEY :

F8 KEY :

F9 KEY :

FlO KEY :

1

EDIT

PRINT

COMPILE

DISCOMPILE

LINK

I/O

SETUP

MNEMONIC EDIT

UTILITY

END

EDIT COMPIL DISCPL

I/O

SETUP

UTILTY END

(2)

Selecting the program to be edited

Enter the name of the source program to be edited.

SELECT SOURCE PROGRAM Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC%

1

SOURCE PROGRAM NAME

:

TEST

EXEC I END

Press the c Fl key. The screen changes, depending on the program to be entered.

1)

2)

3)

If a new program name is specified:

The model setting screen is displayed. Re-confirm the selected model.

Then, the edit menu is displayed.

If the specified name is that of a program created for a model which differs from the

selected model:

The selected model is automatically changed according to the specified program. Then,

the edit menu is displayed.

If the specified name is that of a program created for the selected model:

The edit menu is displayed.

3-6



(3)


To return to the main menu, press the < FlO> or < ESC> key. As the program name, enter

up to eight alphanumeric characters, without an extension.

Displaying the editing menu

Press the < F2 > (LADDER/STEP SEQUNCE) key.

EDIT

RCI(STEP SEQ) [A: YFL~DATAYsFcY 1

Fl KEY : TITLE

F2 KEY :

LADDER / STEP SEQUENCE

F3 KEY : SYMBOL h COMMNET

F4 KEY :

MESSAGE

F5 KEY

: I/O

MODULE

F6 KEY :

SYSTEM PARAMETER

FlO KEY : END

1 TITLE ILADSFC ISYMBOL IMESSAG IMODULEISYSPRM 1

I

I

I I

I

I I

I

I END

I

(4)

Subprogram configuration screen

The subprogram configuration screen is displayed as shown below:


RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:YFLyDATAYSFCOl]



.

. .

‘m;i’J)@ti$., 0 PO002 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007

0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017

0 PO021 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 POO27

.

. . .

.

.

. . . .

.

.

0

PO101 0 PO202 PO304 PO405 PO406 PO407

Sub-program

:

PO001

I

I I I

DELETE

I

NEW ZOOM

3-7



3.

THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Note 1) The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.

Note 2)

If the [ZOOM] key was used to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the

subprogram configuration screen is displayed upon a single press of the [MAIN] key,

the editing of the subprograms for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed is suspended.

Such subprograms are marked with A].

(5)

Step sequence diagram

Position the cursor to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or <RET> key.

The step sequence editing screen is displayed as shown below:

C

DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~]


,.. .)))):.

.,:,:

(..>:‘t’:i

J@J$,

7

s3

cl Sll 0 s13

s21 cl s31

Note 1) The current position of the cursor on the screen is indicated.

The entire screen consists of 32 elements across the screen

and 64 elements from top to bottom. The cursor is positioned to

any element on the screen.

4 (Note 1)

3-8




3.2 Creating a Step Sequence

3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RCI(STEP

SEQ)

[A:~FL~DATAfSFCOl]



;/$;;-'i:&jflQ~ n,... PO004 PO005 PO006 PO007

.: ........

]POOO2 0 0 0 0

0 PO008 0 PO009 0 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017

0 ]POO21 0 PO022 0 PO024 0 PO025 0 PO026 POO27

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

I

DELETE NEW ZOOM

Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key

Other keys

[ DELETE] : Deleting a subprogram [ROLL UP]

: Displaying previous screen

[NEW ] :

Creating a new subprogram [ROLL DOWN] : Displaying next screen

[ZOOM ] :

Modifying a subprogram

Meaning of display

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:%FLYDATAYSFCOl]

Edit

: FAPT LADDER editing screen

(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) : The list screen of subprogram

PMC-RC4 (STEP SEQ) : Setting a model

[A: Y FL.. : Current directory

I


PROGRAM

: Remarks which is one of the title data

aLEVEL EVEL2 OLEVEL3

I

LEVEL1 : The 1st level of ladder

LEVEL2 :

The 2nd level of ladder

LEVEL3 : The 3rd level of ladder

(In case of PMC-RC4 the 3rd ladder level can be omitted, in case of PMCRB4

the 3rd ladder level does not exist.)

0 PO001 POOO2 0 PO004 0 PO005 0 PO006 0 PO007

Cl -: a subprogram of the ladder

01

: a subprogram of the step sequence

3-9




(1) Creating a new subprogram

- Press the [NEW] key.

New program

name ? m

- Enter the number of the subprogram to be created (P200, for example).

- Press the [F2 ] key.

(2) Modifying a subprogram

- Key in the number of the subprogram to be modified (P200, for example), then press the

[ZOOM] or <RET> key.

Alternatively, position the cursor to P200 then press the

[ZOOM] or <RET > key.

- If a subprogram number marked with A ] (P21, for example) is selected, the following

message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it 7 (Yes/No)

[Yl 1

To continue the editing session using the results obtained from suspended previous editing

session, press the < RET > key. To cancel the results of the previous editing session and edit

the subprogram from its original state, enter < N >.

3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program

The basics and configuration of the step sequence are described in the following document:

“FANUC PMC-MODEL RB4/RC4 Supplementary Description of Programming (Ladder Language)

B-61 863EI05-3”

On the step sequence screen, different soft keys are displayed, depending on the position of the

cursor.

When the cursor is on the step line, following softkey menu is displayed.

I

. .I

cl] s2

‘:ti;:ili;;$;$

I

0 s20

+- La

cl s30

cl

101

1

I

-+ JHP

FUNC

CHK ZOOM

3-10




1

0

I:

Step subprogram

[ tLBL ] :

1

UJI 1:

Initial step subprogram

I A- I:

[ 01 I:

Block step subprogram ( FUNC ] :

1 I

I :

Line for link [ CHK ] :

[ +JMP ] : Jump to label

( ZOOM ] :

Label for jump

The end of block step

Various functions

Grammatical checking

Zooming into a subprogram

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

FUNC CHK

ZOOM

[ t I:

I l- I :

[ l== 1:

I

I I:

I t- I :

[t== 1:

[

I :

[ FUNC ] :

[ CHK ] :

[ ZOOM ] :

Transition

Divergence of selective sequence

Divergence of simultaneous sequence

Line for link

Convergence of selective sequence

Convergence of simultaneous sequence

Various functions

Grammatical checking

Zooming into a subprogram

(1)

Entering a step

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key.

Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [n] key causes a step to be created, as shown below.

A free step number is automatically assigned.

iii;‘iij,t~.:.:.~.:.Y::“:

~~~

.;:.S

$5

:::: ,:i-i_._:~:”

..,.:.._

STEP : Sl

.

ACTION :?

l-1

I

- JMP +LBL -L FUNC

CHK ZOOM

The specified subprogram number (PlO in this example) is displayed below Sl.

3-11




(2)

STEP : 81

ACTION : PlO

l-l

To change the step number, press the <RET> key to position the character cursor ” .?’ on

STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.

.:$:f B~~:.:~

~~~~:

T;f;y . . :.:.::.:

,,i;;,;i;y:::::::::>:..

,... .:.:::::::::

)::::::, ::::“::...:.:.:.:.:.~..~:

.:

. : . :. : , : . :. : : . ’

STEP : Slg

ACTION : PlO

l-l

Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key.

Enter a subprogram number

Press the

[ + ]

key.

ACTION : ‘.:$

l-2

FUN

CHR

ZOOM

Enter a subprogram number.

I

o)i ,:ilFI:t:~:~::s:‘~~~~~~

.\:

.

:..:‘::p::; ;I:,. ,.:

3

:

+

.::.::.

:.:~~~~~

. :

j::+ ::~.~:~,~.~::~~~:~,:::~.:,~,.~:i.~

.‘::.‘; :........, ..:.:“::>,. .>

,:, . . ;,.;..

: : . .i.;:; 1::: ..:

.:.I,., :..

ACTION : $100

l-2

3-12




(3)

Divergence of selective sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 --_I key.

FUNC CHR

ZOOM

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 -_I key.

I I

(4)

Convergence of selective sequence

Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ f -] key.

ACTION : PlO&

2-4

1 +.

I+_Il=zl

1 It-_lt__l

FUNC CHK

ZOOM

3-13



x

g

u

u

z

I

I

c-i--

II

-

I

- -

z

u

Yz

II

t-j---

I

I

-- -t-




Specifying a label for jump destination

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [- LBL] key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the [+ LBL] key.

I

+ JMP +LBL 1

FUN HR

ZOOM

LABEL : Ll@;

l-l

Enter a label name.

STEP : Sl

ACTION : PlO

l-l

3-15




(8) Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [+ JMP] key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the [+ JMP) key.

A...

LEBEL : $$

2-3

I

+ JMP + LBL FUNC

CHK

200?4

Enter a label name.

+-

L10

101 s1

I

PlOO

PlOO

f-r

::,::'.i,jjj.~:~:i'i.li~:~;i:

:;.;_ ,;::;.;<.:.y

, 2

&A:itxiO

t

;I:;:-"'i'i.:.:?.i':...

., .:::::i.:y,

.

:,,;:>,:

. ‘.:.:...:.:.:;.:.:.:.:.:.:

:~~:~.~:~::..‘.::‘:::::~::::~:~:~:::::

PlOO

LEBEL : Llfi:

2-3

3-16




(9) Deleting an element

Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the [DEL] key.

I

elect the element by the <DEL> key and press the <return> key

In the example shown above, two figures (elements) of a selective branch and transition are

selected. Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse

video. To position the cursor displayed in reverse video, press the [DEL] key. To restore the

state shown above, press the (ESC] key.

If the [RETURN] key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective branch is deleted and

the following screen is displayed:

3-17




To specify another figure, press the [DEL] key again.

I

I01 Sl

.

.k

..,.......

.I . . . . . .

>:..A .,

.:..

:::.. :

‘:~l;;;i;~g~.

.

Inserting an element

Position the cursor to the desired insertion position, then press the [INS] key. To create an

mpty row, press the [INS] key.

o create an empty column, press the [SHIFT] and [INS] keys.

STEP : S2

ACTION :

p 2 0 0 @$

l-3

3-18




Press the (INS] key.

l-3

Press the [SHIFT] and [INS] key.

IO1 Sl

c

l

Cl Sll

cl s21

I

I

STEP : S2

ACTION : PlO2

l-3

3-19




(11) Search

q;;..“;.===== =,

..::::. ...:j:::ji(ij:j.

..;:.I‘I:;:‘:‘: :.:.::: jj ::..:.

1

g$j::$i:.;.‘:“‘l:li:-J

SlO

;;. t

Cl s20

(,,

,..,::,,...

_..

:)>>::..,:: .::.:5:":

.

:.

.."."..."~>;.>:.,.::.:.>

: ?....

.,

.i..

Pl

Pll

t

P21

T2

cl SlO Cl s20

I

I

If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed as

shown below:

Fl Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 Main

S

List

Y3

cl Sll cl s21

I

I

Press the [Fl] (Search) key. A pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

t

Pl

Fl

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

Step

Action

Label

symbol

Position

Top

Bottom

3-20




Then, press the (Fl] (Step) key. Another pop-up menu is displayed, as shown below:

Enter the step number to be searched for (S20, for example), then press the < RET > key.

The system starts searching through the part subsequent to the cursor.

Copying or moving an element

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

t

Pl

3-21




When the [F8) (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed as shown below:

Fl Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

FS List

Press the [F2) (Copy) key. The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.

ACTION

:

Specify Start position

l-2

Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example shown below), then

press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.

It

Pl

.gi.lj?“

.::;;;y;: :,:.:

i +

.>.::.::::::

,.

:: ‘:: :::::.::::::

. ._

,(,.:.:.,.:

S2

;;::,&T .:*:...

..:.:.:..q:‘-: IJ s20

:..:.. ./\. : , .,..

.j,..;.

:::.y::::::: ,..:.

::,:;.: .,::.:,,..‘. ::.;

. ,.. .‘.‘.,i::::.::::::.;::.:.+:

Pl

Pll

+

P21

I

ACTION

:

Specify End position

2-3

3-22



3.

THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS

Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then

press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.

:z’:’ J::”

S2

;;; ~~~

:~~~~~~:~~~~

i c

I:::iliii:ll:i:li#i:~,::,:~:~:~:~~:

:::‘.zyi.~.I_:~~I:I:I:i.i:~~~~~~~~~:~~:~:,,~,~~

:....:.:...:>:...:.:i\:.:

. ,. . ..\..\\:. ._..,,, ,,,,.,,,

.,i,i:I:I:I:I’I:i:I’I:I:i::I:i6:i:

:j;j;y:~~:~,~:~:~:~:~:~:~::::::.,.~~.~::i:~.~r~:~~:::~~:..~,:;:;:y:;:~:..:::::::::.:.:.:..:.:

:::.:;;:::~~~~~::5::iili:~Bi:~:~~:::::~:

+

:.:_.,..:.::;:::::::

p1 C.“

.;,,.,,::I:~;~~ws~;~~~:;:,‘::.;..:,,

. ‘.y,,:...::::z::i,:,

.,.,.,...

I:::.::‘:

.:.:..,:.:.:.:.:.:.:,,

.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:i(.:.,.;..

,;:;i:@ :qgg

L.............

..

:.:.::::::::::::::::::::::::

.:.: ,.(.l,L..i_

:.:.....::.“:f+;~::‘:.:.:.::::::.:.:::.:.:.:.:....:,.

::;:y:i:::;:::.,.:,:::,:::::::z:i::

..,,‘,):‘,::,:,...:,.y:::,.,

I

ACTION

:

Specify End position

3-4

Position the cursor to the desired copy destination (position 4-3 in the example shown below),

then press the < RET > key. The specified part is copied.

t

Pl

ACTION

:

PlOO

When a part is copied,

- The S address is not copied. Assign a free number.

- The P address is copied. If required, change the address.

3-23




(13)

Returning from the ZOOM destination to the program configuration screen (MAIN).

To return to the program configuration screen, displayed when editing was started, follow the

procedure below. The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence subprogram,

from which the [ZOOM] key was pressed, is suspended.

The edited subprogram is not saved in the source program file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.

$1::”

_....\\..

::;;g:: .‘:;:::y:y:;:~::

_, .,. . . ,.,_

$Q;”

.’

.‘.Y .* 1

$.:‘rii:”

0

SlO

Cl

s20

~~~~ tpll i

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

F3 Move

F4

mAin

F5 List

rfter pressing the (F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~)


LEVEL1 LEVEL2

LEVEL3

$@,iip;& $ 0

~0002

0

PO004

0

pooo5 0 poooe

0 p(JoO7

0008 0 PO009

0 PO014

0 PO015 PO016

0 PO017

A]~0021 0 PO022

0 PO024

0 PO025 0 PO026

POO27

. . .

. . .

.

0 ~0101 b

.

. .

~0202

PO304

0JPO405 c]]PO406

&PO407

3-24




If the subprogram whose previous editing session was suspended (marked with A]) is

selected again for editing, the following message is displayed:

Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ? (Yes/No

1 [Yl

(14)

To continue the previous editing session, press the [RET] key.

Otherwise, enter N. (The result of the previous editing session is cancelled.)

LIST

The list of subprograms referenced by the stepsequence subprogram that is currently being

edited is displayed.

Press the (F8] (FUNC) key.

i_i:.::~~.::;:.; 7 = = = = j =

.:::::.:::::ii:‘:I:‘i8iiiiiiii

:~~~~~~~ Cl SlO

cl s20

.

.I ‘+

.

.I’.‘..

.:.:,:.:::.:::.::::::~:;::~::,:

‘.‘.:‘::.‘.‘.::.:.;.:

:::,t :: i;::‘i:::i::i::_:~::.~

Pl Pll

t

P21

After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key

t

Pl

=II=I=t=III

Fl Search

F2 Copy

F3 Move

F4 mAin

F5 List

I

I

After pressing the [F4] (LIST) key


R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~]


OJP200

0 PO008 0 PO009 0

PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 0 PO017

0 PO021 0 PO022 0

PO024 PO025 0 PO026 POO27

I

MAIN CHANGE

ZOOM

3-25




Following keys are useful in this screen.

Function key

Other keys

[ MAIN

] :Displaying the subprogram

[ROLL UP]

: Displaying previous screen

configuration screen [ROLL DOWN] : Displaying next screen

[ CHANGE ] :Creating a new subprogram

[ ZOOM

] :Modifying a subprogram

Screen display

I

P200

I

The subprogram which is being edited is displayed. If the [ZOOM] key is pressed to nest the

program to a certain depth, the subprogram numbers are arranged from the left in the order in

which they are nested.

The subprogram for which the [ZOOM] key was pressed first is

displayed at the left end.

( 0 PO008 0 PO009 [I3 PO014 0 PO015 0 PO016 O017

Subprograms referenced by the subprogram that is currently being edited are listed with the

following mark: :

cl :

Ladder subprogram

cl] : Step sequence subprogram

(15)Checking the syntax

Press the [CHK] key.

t

Pl

.;:.(.‘:.:.:.:.~:.~::::::::::,

gqc.

:.::.:::,:::I:.‘:,:,::::....:.

j:,..., :.:7 ./.

;-,~:il~:~:~~

,.,; ::~...,.,.:

I

0

s

1

0

0 s20

:,t-ll~~ t

Pll P21

3-26




If the step sequence is satisfactory, the following message is displayed:

.;.“..::..:.::;: .:

."f:

.. ....................

... . ... . .....

.....

.:.:.::

..?..): ..: ..:.:.:::: .

: : : >: :

..................

~~~~~~~~

slo

.:.::.:..:.

.. .:

“:.:‘:‘:j::::::::

:>::z: .::i;i::,i:i::llii;ili:iliiilcy;

2;:s:: ............

...

. :.:.

. >

...................

...................

t t

Pl

Pll

Check completed

I

If the step sequence is invalid, the following message is displayed:

+

Pl + ~11

[Chart Sequence

error

1

I

I

I

I

(16)Modifying a subprogram (ZOOM)

Press the [ZOOM] key.

~~~~~~~l,;~~.~==== =

::::::::;:;:::::::;:::.:,:g:>::;:;:i:

“~~:~~~~di

0 SlO

:; t

cl s20

. ::.:i”.:.:.:::::+. 2;.

,.,,,,,;,:.,....

,:::.::.::

: ;$ jjj,::jjj:,:~~g::j:~::

Pl

Pll

t

P21

Y2

cl SlO Cl

s20

I I

3 - 27



When the [ZOOM] key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram

which is to be edited.

L

Figure

Meaning of the figure

Subprogram to be edited

0

Step sequence subprogram

Ladder subprogram

101

Initial step sequence subprogram Ladder subprogram

01

block step sequence subprogram

Step S8qU8nC8 subprogram

t

Transition

Ladder subprogram


(17)End of modifying

Press the

[ESC]

key.

Fl Save update) h quit

F2 Quit

F3 Edit

F4 Rename,

save h quit

F5 Optimize

Menus

Menu

I

Editing

I

Result of editing

I

Display

Save

I

nd

I

ptimized

Quit

Edit

Rename

optimize

End

Continue

End

Continue

Discarded

Continued

Updated

Optimized and continued

-

Not optimized

Optimized

Optimized

3-28



L

C

L

n

a





Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),

or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1. For PC9801

PC980 1

25pin male

connector

On-line cable

25pin male

connector

CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2. For IBM PC/AT

IBM PC/AT

g-pin female

connector

IBM PC/AT cable

25pin male

connector

25pin female

connector

On-line cable

II

25-pin male

connector


3. For IBM PS/2

IBM PSI2

25-pin female

connector

IBM PS/2 cable

25-pin male

connector

25-pin female

connector

On-line cable

n

t

25-pin male

connector

1


Al-l




0 On-line cable (AOSB-0031-K8Ol/K802)

SD

RD

RS

25dn male

connector

cs

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

IBM PC/AT cable

CD

RD

SD

g-Din female

connector

ER

SG

DR

RS

cs

Cl

2

2

4

4

I 5

I

5

ZI E

7

7

1

1

1

8

2

3

3

2

4 20

5

7

6

6

7

4

8

5

9

22

SD

RD

RS

25-pin male

cs

connector

ER

DR

CD

SG

FG

CD

RD

SD

25-pin female

ER connector

SG

DR

RS

cs

Cl

Al-2



AP

b



APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING

THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH

RAM

1. GENERAL

This appendix describes the procedure for operating the PMC-L using built-in RAM or the PMC-M

using the optional RAM board. It also describes related notes.

2.

(1)

(2)

HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

PMC-L

No extra hardware is needed.

The PMC-L is operated with ROM only when the PMC-L is provided with the ROM and without

the Ladder Edit Cassette (printed circuit board).

PMC-M

The optional RAM board is necessary.

It is also necessary to mount the Ladder Edit Cassette

or to mount ROMs for the PMC-M on the ROM sockets, OEl and OE2, on the memory board.

Mount the PMC-M ROMs on the sockets as shown below.

ROM number Socket location on the memory card

OF1

-_)

OEl

OF1

+

OEl

Memory card

(A16B-1212-0210)

(Note 1)

(Note 2)

When the PMC-M is provided with the ROM board, it is operated with ROM whether

the Ladder Edit Cassette is mounted or not.

When a ladder program is modified using the Ladder Edit Cassette on the PMC-M

provided with the ROM board, the PMC-M executes the original ladder program stored

in the ROM board, and the modified ladder program is displayed on the screen with the

DGNOS ladder diagram display function. The program being executed and the

program being displayed are different.

A2-1




THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM

3. RAM OPERATION

Follow the flowchart shown below to perform the RAM operation.

(1) PMC-L

Contents of the

backup RAM

Yes

No

Is the EPROM

Parameter for

displaying the

PMC load select

Yes

screen

=I pk

(see Section 4)

(Note) Ladder programs

stored in the EPROM are

copied to the RAM.

A2-2





(2) PMC-M

Contents of the

backup RAM

Yes

I

Is the EPROM

Parameter for

Yes

displaying the

PMC load select

screen

No

PMC LOADING

ADDRESS:OOOOH

DATA: OOH

ROM operation

(Note) Ladder

programs stored in

the EPROM on the

ROM board are

copied to the RAM.

==k I

Note) Transferring ladder programs from the

FAPT LADDER is needed. RAM contents are

deleted when the power is turned off.

RAM

i

PMC load select

screen

(see Section 4)

AZ-3





(3) Notes on RAM operation in the PMC-M

Follow the description below.

@ When a ladder oroaram sent from the FAPT LADDER is executed on RAM ooeration

Mount the ROMs for the PMC-M into the sockets usually used for the PMC-L on the

memory board. Write data into the ROM using the PMC-M management software that is

the same version as that used for transferring a ladder program. A ladder program that

only contains the END code (SUBl, SUB2, and SUB48) can be used.

When a ladder program is sent from a ROM or a floppy disk that contains a program which can

be executed, follow the description above.

8 When a ladder oroctram chanaed or created usina the Ladder Edit Cassette is executed on

RAM ooeration

Merhod 7: Mount the Edit Cassette.

The PMC-M management software in the Edit

Cassette executes the ladder program.

Mefhod 2: Mount the Edit Cassette.

Also mount the ROMs for the PMC-M into the

sockets usually used for the PMC-L on the memory board.

The PMC-M

management software in the ROM executes the ladder program.

To change a ladder program which is executed on RAM operation, follow the description

above.

If an attempt is made to perform RAM operation in conditions other than those described

above, ROM parity alarm 604 is issued. Satisfy the above conditions first. Then perform RAM

operation.

A2-4




THE PMC-UM WITH RAM

4. PMC LOAD SELECT SCREEN

The PMC load select screen shown below varies depending on hardware configuration.

When the Edit Cassette is not mounted

Item (5) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

When the PMC-L is not provided with ROMs on the sockets;

When the PMC-M is not provided with ROMs on the sockets nor the ROM board is not

mounted on the PMC-M;

Item (2) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.

PMC LOAD SELECT

1) LOAD FROM I/O

2) LOAD FROM EROM

3) RUN

4) RUN WITHOUT PMC

5) EDIT LADDER

PUSH l-5

KEY :

Fig. 4

Whether the PMC load select screen is displayed or not is determined by the setting of DPCRAM,

a bit of the following CNC parameter.

NO.71

I

DPCRAM

I

I

#7

#6 #5

#4

#3 #2

#l

#O

DPCRAM 1: The PMC load select screen is not displayed.

0: The PMC load select screen is displayed.

A2-5





1. MAIN MENU/SETTINGS

Message

xxx executable file not found.

Hit any key

Description and action to be taken

- Executable file xxx does not exist in the system

directory.

- System directory is not specified in the declaration

made by environment variable PATH.

Insufficient memory.

Hit any key

- Main memory is insufficient. Arrange setup so that

sufficient main memory can be acquired (500 KB or

more).

xxx process error. Hit any key

xxx file l/O error.

- Error occurred while loading executable file xxx.

- I/O error for the xxx file occurred during system

setup for the type of machine being used.

Not found “I_COxxx.EXE”. - The executable file of compiler was not found.

Install the system again.

Not found “FLxxx.TBL”.

- No system setup file was found.

- There is no machine type setting file that can be

used by the compiler. install the system again.

A3-1




2. ERRORS AT [LIST] COMMAND

Message (compilation & printer)

MAKING DATA TABLE

WRITING SELECTED FILE DATA

Meaning and Dealing

- Data table for target program list is making.

- When source program list screen exit, writing

selected files into P INTERF.DAT.

OPEN ERROR P_INTERF.DAT

HIT ANY KEY...

- There is no P INTERF.DAT in current directory.

READ ERROR P_INTERF.DAT

HIT ANY KEY...

- Reading error about P INTERF.DAT.

WRITE ERROR P INTERF.DAT

HIT ANY KEY... -

- Writing error about P INTERF.DAT.

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY. HIT ANY

KEY...

FILE ALREADY SELECT. HIT ANY

KEY...

- Memory is not sufficient for source program list

screen.

- The number of selected file is out of range.

NOT BE SELECTED FILE, YET.

- When any file are not selected as target file, you

can’t move the cursor to target file list screen.

NOT FOUND IN CURRENT - Specified strings is not found.

DIRECTORY. HIT ANY KEY... (Search for file name)

NOT FOUND SPECIFIED STRINGS.

- Specified strings is not found.

HIT ANY KEY... (Search for PMC model)

NOT MODIFIED EXTEND, ALREADY - You can’t change the extension, when selected files

SELECTED FILES. HIT ANY KEY... are exist in select file list screen.

ABSOLUTE PATH MUST BE - Absolute path must be specified, with using

SPECIFIED. HIT ANY KEY... [DRIVE ] command.

INPUT ERROR DIRECTORY NAME. - Specified directory name is not found, with using

L-IIT ANY KEY. [DRIVE] command.

A3-2




3. EDITING (SOURCE PROGRAM SELECTION)

Message

Insufficient memory.


- There is not sufficient main memory for loading an

executable file. An area of 500 KB or more is

required.

nsufficient disk space.

\lot found xxx Set-up file.

- Disk space was used up during file l/O.

- System setup file xxx does not exist in the system

directory.

\lot found xxx PMC-OS file.

- Software management file xxx does not exist in the

system directory.

(xx file I/O error.

- I/O error occurred for file xxx during creation of a

source program file.

llegal xxx Source-program name. - Invalid characters appear in the name, xxx, of the

input source program file.

inachine Kind And Input Program Not

>onsistency PMC series is xxx.

- Machine type for the input program and the

machine type for the system (common table file) do

not agree. Perform proper system setup for the

type of machine being used.

‘lease Appoint Program Name

- Neither the input program name nor the output

program name were specified when a source

program name was specified.

Output Program Already Exist

All Right? (Y/N)

- File already exists with the name specified for the

output program. To overwrite this file, enter ‘3”‘.

To cancel, enter “N”.

nake New Source Program

- Specified input/output program name does not

exist. A new file is being created.

‘lease Appoint Output Program Name - Specify an output program name.

Ippointed Input Program Not Exist

- Names of the input program and output program do

not agree and the input program does not exist.

xx Symbol & Comment data broken. - Symbol and comment data in input program xxx

contain error(s).

A3-3




3.1 Ladder Diagram Editing

Message

ILLEGAL OPERATION


- Only the RETURN key was pressed.

- Address data input is incorrect.

EDIT BUFFER OVER

70LINE/l NET OVER

LARGE NET APPEARED

256STEP/l NET OVER

- Editing is not being performed within the limits

when creating function instructions.

- Function instructions cannot be created while the

cursor is on the right-hand side.

- Editing buffer was exceeded during net creation.

- Editing cannot be continued due to the large size of

nets being edited. Make nets smaller.

MNEMONIC BUFFER OVER - Attempt was made to make a LADDER program of

more than 21,840 (24,000 when an EMS board is

used) steps.

SET COUNT OVER

INPUT INVALID

- Too many items in data table

- Non-numeric character(s) were specified for

[COPY], [INSLIN], ]C-UP], or [C-DOWN].

- Input address was specified in a coil.

- Data table contains invalid character(s).

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING

HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL

- Relay or coil address is not specified.

- Relay or coil is required.

- Horizontal lines in LADDER diagram are

unconnected.

VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL

‘ARAMETER NOTHING

-ADDER ILLEGAL

ERROR NET FOUND

- Vertical lines in LADDER diagram are incorrect.

- Function instruction parameters have not been set.

- LADDER diagram is incorrect.

- Incorrect net found when [COPY][MOVE] was

specified.

- Error found on the screen during a search beyond

the screen.

3ELAY OR COIL FORBIT

‘LEASE COMPLETE NET

LLEGAL NETS CLEARED

ADDRESS BIT NOTHING

- Unnecessary relay or coil exists.

- An incorrect net was found.

- Net which did not match the specified level of the

stack was found and deleted from the LADDER

program which was read in.

- Specified address was not found during address

search.

-UNCTION NOT FOUND

- Specified function instruction was not found during

function instruction search.

A3-4




Message


STACK REGISTER OVER (8bit) ERR - There are 9 or more continuous stacks in the

LADDER program which was read in.

NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE - There is not enough data area for the specified file.

FILE NOT READ

- Disk space insufficient during writing

DISK SPACE NOTHING

- Error occurred when reading data from a file.

FILE NOT WRITE

- Error occurred when writing data to a file.

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. HIT ANY - Area to be used in editing could not be acquired.

KEY

3.2

Other Editing (Applicable to Title, Message, System Parameter, Symbol

and Comment, and I/O Module Editing)

Message

File Read Error Hit Any Key

File Write Error Hit any Key

File I/O Error Hit Any Key

Not Enough Space

Same Symbol Data Exist

No Definition Address Appointed

Data Save Error

Not Found Data Error

Input Data Invalid

Appointed group Not Exist

Appointed Base Not Exist

Appointed Slot Not Exist

Appointed ID Code Not Exist

Input Key Not Used

Invalid Address Appoint


- File could not be read.

- File could not be written.

- File I/O error occurred.

- Work area for message editing could not be

acquired due to insufficient memory.

- Symbol data already exists that is identical to

symbol data that was input.

- Nonexistent address was specified.

- Error occurred when symbol or comment data was

being registered in the work area.

- Required data could not be found during symbol

data lookup.

- There is an input error in the l/O module settings.

- There is an error in the group that was input.

- There is an error in the base that was input.

- There is an error in the slot that was input.

- There is an error in the ID code that was input.

- Undefined key was specified.

- Specified address could not be found during

search.

Invalid Value

Operate Panel Address Error

- Out-of-bound value was input.

- Data other than a numeric value was input.

- Addresses have not been set at the operation

panel.

A3-5




4. PRINTER

Message

DATA INPUT ERROR


- There is an error in the data input in the setup

screens such as the type selection screen for

diagram output.

NOT FIND FILE

- Nonexistent file name was entered in the source

program selection screen.

DIFFERENT MACHINE CODE.

- Machine type codes in the common table file and

the management file do not agree.

WRITE ERROR COMONDAT.TBL.

HIT ANY KEY...

NOT EXIST AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...

WRITE ERROR AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...

DATA INVALID AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY.

HIT ANY KEY...

FILE READ ERROR.

HIT ANY KEY...

- Error occurred when a program name was written

to the common table file.

- AMROFTRP.DAT (print format data file) does not

exist.

- Error occurred when the paper size was written to

AMROFTRP.DAT.

- Data in AMROFTRP.DAT is incorrect. Reinstall the

system program.

- Tried to acquire memory but there was no memory

area of a sufficient size.

- There is no title file or system parameter file.

- Either symbol or comment file could not be found

during LADDER diagram printing or cross-reference

printing.

- Existing file could not be read in.

CHANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT.

HIT ANY KEY...

- [BREAK] key was pressed during printing.

SEL SWITCH OFF

DATA INVALID ‘xxxxxxxX’.

HIT ANY KEY...

OPEN ERROR OUTPUT FILE.

HIT ANY KEY...

OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED.

HIT ANY KEY...

OUTPUT FILE ALREADY EXIST.

OVER WRITE (YIN)

WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE.

HIT ANY KEY...

CANCEL FILE OUTPUT.

HIT ANY KEY...

- SEL button of the printer is off. Turn it on.

- Error occurred during reading of the print format

data file.

- Error occurred during opening of output file. There

is not sufficient space on the disk.

- No output file is specified in the print format data

file.

- File exists with the same name as the output file.

Enter “Y” to overwrite or “N” to cancel output.

- Error occurred during writing to the output file.

There is not sufficient space on the disk.

- [BREAK] key was pressed during file output.

SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA

BROKEN. HIT ANY KEY...

- Symbol and comment data files are invalid.

A3-6




5. COMPILATION, DECOMPILATION, AND LINKING

Message Description and action to be taken

Error title 80

- Character code not permitted by PMC was found

during title compilation.

Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER).

Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’

- System parameter that specifies use of the

operation panel was specified and there was an

invalid address specified in the external DI (KEY

data) address, external DO (LED) address, PMC

image address (DI), or PMC image address (DO).

This system parameter is forcibly turned off and

processing is continued (PMC-R series only).

Error message 60

- Size of a message exceeded the maximum size for

the system.

Error message 61


during message compilation.

Error symbol/comment 70 - During compilation, the size of a symbol or

comment exceeded the maximum size for the

system.

Error symbol/comment 71

- During compilation, when the message area was

extended, symbol and comment data overflowed

the permitted ROM size.

Error symbol/comment 72 - Character code not permitted by PMC was found

during symbol compilation.

Error symbol/comment 73


during comment compilation.

Error ladder 40

Error end 2

- During LADDER compilation, the size of the

LADDER program exceeded the maximum size for

the system.

Error ladder 41

- During LADDER compilation, when the symbol and

comment area was extended, the LADDER program

overflowed the permitted ROM size.

Error ladder 42

Error end 2

- Invalid intermediate LADDER code was found

during LADDER compilation.

- Invalid LADDER object was found during LADDER

decompilation.

Error ladder 48 - There is an invalid intermediate code in the

intermediate code file.

Error end 25 - There are no intermediate codes for the LADDER.

- There is no #LA file.

Error end 3

Error end 4

- Number of partition codes exceeded 99.

- Execution time for the first level ladder exceeds the

PMC default value or the time set in the system

parameter.

A3-7




Message


Error end 17

- END2 was found before END1 or END1 was not

found before the LADDER program ended.

Error end 18

- END3 was found before END2 or END2 was not

found before the LADDER program ended.

Error end 19

- END3 was not found before the LADDER program

ended.

Error end 20

Error end 21

Error end 24

Error end 5

Error end 6

Error end 7

Error end 11

Error end 12

Error end 13

Error end 8

Error end 9

Error end 10

Error end 14

Error end 15

Error end 16

Error end 27

(Does not include third level ommission mode.)

- There is more than one ENDl.

- There is more than one END2.

- There is LADDER program code following END3

- END1 exists in common control mode.



- END1 exists in jump control mode.



- COM exists in common control mode.

- COME exists in common control mode in which the

number of coils is specified.

- COME exists outside of common control mode.

- JMP exists in jump control mode.

- JMPE exists in jump control mode in which the

number of coils is specified.

- JMPE exists outside of jump control mode.

- WRT or WRT.NOT does not exist following a

function instruction that requires WRT or

WRT.NOT.

Uarning end 29

- Number of coils was specified in a machine type for

which the number of JMP coils cannot be specified.

The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE

specification mode) and processing is continued.

Narning end 30

- Number of coils was specified in a machine type for

which the number of COM coils cannot be

specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE

specification mode) and processing is continued.

A3-8




Message


Error link 90 - During linking, SO record was not found before the

end of the load module.

- Different S record exists before the SO record.

Error link 92

- During linking, the value for the record length area

in the S2 record was less than 4.

- S record other than SO, S2, S8, or S9 was found.

- No S8 or S9 record was found before the end of

the load module.

irror link 93 - During linking, an attempt was made to load a load

module into an area other than the specified

address area.

\lot appoint source program name

- No source program was specified for compilation or

decompilation.

riot appoint ROM format file name - ROM format file name was not specified for

compilation, decompilation or linking.

Jot appoint load module file name

Iut of memory

- No load module file name was specified for linking.

- Work area required for processing cannot be

acquired. This occurs because a device driver

which requires a large amount of memory is

resident, because data is too large, or for some

similar reason.

Jot enough space

- Not enough space is available on disk for file

creation during compilation, decompilation or

linking.

:ile already exist

?enewal (Y/N)?

‘rogram already exist

?enewal (Y/N)?

qead error

- Name specified for ROM format file during

compilation already exists.

- #CN file of the source program specified for

decompilation already exists.

- #CN or #PA file of the source program specified for

compilation does not exist.

- Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.

Iead error

lead error

Vrite error

Vrite error

- ROM format file specified for decompilation or

linking does not exist.

- Machine type of the ROM format file specified for

decompilation differs from the machine type

specified in the machine type setting.

- Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

- Load module file specified for linking does not exist.

- Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.



A3-9




Message

(System parameter) Read error



(Note) When no #PA file exists for the specified

source program, the following message is displayed.

“Cannot read source program j-l-j-\.”

(Title) Read error

(I/O module) Read error

(Message) Read error

Symbol) Read error

Comment) Read error


(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no

#TA file exists for the specified source program.



#IO file exists for the specified source program.



#ME file exists for the specified source program.



#SY file exists for the specified source program.



#Cl file exists for the specified source program.

:Ladder) Read error

‘System parameter) Write error

:Title) Write error

‘I/O module) Write error

Message) Write error

Symbol) Write error

Comment) Write error

Ladder) Write error

EXECUTING



#LA file exists for the specified source program.




- Some sort of disk t/O error occurred.




- Time-consuming processing is being performed

during compilation, decompilation, or linking.

(Note) This is not an error message.

A3-10




6.

COMPILE ERRORS

Compile errors can be divided into the following two basic groups:

- Error:Processing is stopped because of a fatal error. The processing can not be continued

unless the cause of the error has been removed.

- Warning: Processing of a subprogram for which a warning is output is stopped.

The processing of other subprograms is continued.

6.1 Path O/warning

001

- Editing sub-program has not completed ( Pn )

(Cause) The editing of a subprogram (Pn.$SJ) has not been completed.

002

- Multiple sub-program with same number exist ( Pn )

003 .

The title data which could not be display on the CNC was replaced with space code

(Cause) The title data contains a code which cannot be processed (a Japanese code,

for example).

004 *

Illegal OP.PANEL( PARAMETER ). Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’.

(Cause) Although the system parameter for the use of the FO machine operator’spanel

is set to YES, the DI/DO address data is not specified.

6.2 Path O/error/password

005 *

Verification error.

(Cause) The password is invalid.

(Cause) A ladder program and step sequence program have identical numbers.

006 * This word can not be used as password.Try another word.

(Cause) The entered password is not valid.

(Action) Enter another password.

007 * Only alphabetical and numerical characters are allowed.

(Cause) A non-alphanumeric character is specified.

6.3 Path O/error/others

008 - Not appoint source program.

(Cause) No source program name is specified.

009

* Not appoint ROM format file name.

(Cause) No ROM file name is specified.

A3-11




010

- Not enough disk space.

(Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk.

011

- Out of memory.

(Cause) There is insufficient free space in memory.

012

* xxx Source-Program name illegal.

(Cause) The source program name is invalid.

013

- xxx file not found.

(Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.

014

* xxx read error.

(Cause) The source program may have been damaged or destroyed.

015

* xxx write error.

(Cause) A write error occurred, the cause is not known.

016

-xxx file already exist.

(Cause) A ROM file having the same name exists. (warning)

017

* xxx Source-program not found.

(Cause) The xxx source program cannot be found.

018

- xxx(System parameter) read error.

(Cause) The system parameter data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

019

* xxx(Title) read error.

(Cause) The title data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

020

* xxx(V0 module) read error.

(Cause) The I/O module data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.

6.4 Path l/warning

001

- Not found Sub-program.

(Cause) An empty file was compiled.

002

* Sub-program number is different from Source-program.

(Cause) The specified program number does not agree with a stored programnumber.

003

* There is no ‘SP’ instruction at the head of the subprogram.

(Cause) The specified subprogram does not begin with the SP instruction.

Alternatively, the data of the specified file has been damaged or destroyed.

A3-12




004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

* ‘SP’ instruction was detected in the subprogram.

(Cause) Data was already present before SP instruction.

* There is no ‘SPE’ instruction at the bottom of the subprogram.

(Cause) Data remained after SPE instruction.

- There is an undefined instruction.

(Cause) A code of other than a step sequence instruction is stored.

* Specified value for a parameter of the xxxx instruction is outside the range.

(Cause) The parameter of the xxxx instruction falls outside the predetermined range.

* An illegal program number is specified for the xxxx instruction.

(Cause) The program number specified for the xxxx instruction falls outside the

predetermined range.

- An illegal label number is specifed for the xxxx instruction.

(Cause) The label number specified for the xxxx instruction falls outside the


- The label of xxxx is used twice or more.

(Cause) A label number is duplicated within a single subprogram.

* The number of label exceeds the limit.

(Cause) An attempt was made to exceed the maximum number of labels that can be

defined in a single subprogram.

* Illegal ‘DSTEP’ instruction was detected,

(Cause) The DLBL instruction is not defined. Alternatively, the definition of the DSTEP

instruction is duplicated.

* LADDER execution time at the 1st level is too large.

(Cause) The overall execution time of the first level exceeds the predetermined limit.

(Action) Reduce the size of the program of the first level.

* The coil number specification of JMP instruction is not allowed.

.

(Cause) The parameter of the JMP instruction (number of coils to be jumped) is other

than 0.

(Action) Specify 0 for the parameter.

- The coil number specification of COM instruction is not allowed.

(Cause) The parameter of the COM instruction (number of coils to be controlled) is

other than 0.

(Action) Specify 0 for the parameter.

A3-13




016

* There is no LADDER program.

(Cause) The level 3/subprogram is empty.

(Action) Add an END3 or SPSPE instruction.

017

- The symbol data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space

code.

(Cause) The symbol contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

018

- The comment data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space

code.

(Cause) The comment contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

019

* The message data which could not be displayed on the CNC was replaced with space

code.

(Cause) The message contains a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.

6.5 Path l/error

020

021

022

023

024

025

026

027

* Not found ‘FLCOMMON.MSG’ file.


- Not found ‘FLCOSTEP.MSG’ file.


- Not found ‘FLxxxxx.TBL’ Set-up file.


* ‘FLxxxxx.TBL’ Set-up file broken.


* Insufficient disk space.

(Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk, preventing data from being output

to the file.

(Action) Delete any unnecessary data from the disk.

’

* LADDER program exists beyond END instruction.

(Cause) A program is specified after the END instruction.

* The number of label exceeds the limit.

(Cause) The number of labels used exceeds the limit (up to 256 for each

level/subprogram).

- There is no label of Lxxxx.

(Cause) The jump destination label for the JMPB instruction is not defined.

(Action) Define the label with the LBL instruction.

A3-14




028

029

030

031

032

033

034

035

036

037

038

039

040

041

042

- The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more.

(Cause) The definition of the label is duplicated.

* There is no END1 instruction.

(Cause) A program of level 1 does not end with an END1 instruction.

* There is no END2 instruction.


- There is no END3 instruction.


* There is no LADDER program.

(Cause) The program of level 1 or 2 is empty.

* There is no SP instruction at the head of the program.

(Cause) The first instruction of a subprogram is not SP.

. Illegal SPE instruction was detected.

(Cause) The SPE instruction is not preceded by the SP instruction.

- LADDER program exists beyond END1 instruction.

(Cause) Within level 1, a program is specified after the END1 instruction.



* LADDER program exists beyond SPE instruction.

(Cause) In a subprogram, a program is specified after the SPE instruction.

* END1 instruction cannot be used excluding the 1st level.

(Cause) The use of the END1 instruction was attempted within level 2 or 3.

. END2 instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.

(Cause) The use of the END2 instruction was attempted within level

1

or 3.

* END3 instruction cannot be used excluding the 3rd level.

(Cause) The use of the END3 instruction was attempted within level 1 or 2.

* END instruction cannot be used.

(Cause) The use of the END instruction was attempted within level 1.

* Program number is different from program name.

(Cause) The subprogram file number does not agree with the number specified in the

parameter of the SP instruction.

A3-15




43

44

45

46

47

48

49

5

051

52

53

54

55

- The size of LADDER program is too large.

(Cause) The object size of the ladder program exceeds the predetermined limit.

(Action) Reduce the size of the ladder program.

* The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END1 instruction.

(Cause) An END1 instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.





- COM instruction was detected in the COM mode.

(Cause) A COM instruction was encountered before the COME instruction.

(Action) Terminate control with the COME instruction, then restart control with the

COM instruction.

- Illegal COME instruction was detected.

(Cause) The COM instruction cannot be found before the COME instruction.

* The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END1 instruction.

(Cause) An END1 instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.

. The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END2 instruction.


- The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END3 instruction.


* JMP instruction was detected in the JMP mode.

(Cause) A JMP instruction was encountered before the JMPE instruction.

(Action) Terminate control with the JMPE instruction, then restart control with the JMP

instruction.

* Illegal JMPE instruction was detected.

(Cause) The JMP instruction cannot be found before the JMPE instruction.



* LADDER program is broken.

(Cause) No instructions can be recoonized.

A3-16




056

057

058

059

060

061

062

063

064

065

066

067

068

069

* There is no coil in the functional instruction which needs the coil.

(Cause) No output instruction is specified after a functional instruction which requires

output.

* SP instruction can not be used in the main program.

(Cause) The use of the SP instruction was attempted within the main program.

. SPE instruction can not be used in the main program.

(Cause) The use of the SPE instruction was attempted within the main program.

* END1 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.

(Cause) The use of the END1 instruction was attempted within a subprogram.

* END2 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.


- END3 instruction can not be used in the subprogram.


* Specified value for a parameter of the functional instruction is outside the range.

(Cause) An illegal value has been specified for the parameter of a functional

instruction.

* An illegal program number is specified for the CALL instruction.

(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the CALL

instruction.

’ An illegal program number is specified for the CALLU instruction.

(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the CALLU

instruction.

. An illegal program number is specified for the SP instruction.

(Cause) A non-P address has been specified for the parameter of the SP instruction.

. There is an undefined instruction.

(Cause) An attempt was made to use a basic or functional instruction which is not

supported by the selected model.

* There is no SPE instruction at the bottom of the subprogram.

(Cause) A subprogram does not end with the SPE instruction.

* SP instruction was detected in the subprogram.

(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before an SPE instruction.

* The range controled by COM instruction is beyond SPE instruction.

(Cause) An SPE instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

A3-17




070

071

072

073

074

075

076

077

078

079

080

081

082

083

* The destination of JMP instruction is beyond SPE instruction.

(Cause) An SPE instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

* CALL instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.

(Cause) The use of the CALL instruction was attempted within level 1 or 3.

* CALLU instruction cannot be used excluding the 2nd level.

(Cause) The use of the CALLU instruction was attempted within level 1 or 3.

. The range controled by COM instruction is beyond END instruction.

(Cause) An END instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

- The destination of JMP instruction is beyond END instruction.

(Cause) An END instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

* The range controled by COM instruction is beyond SP instruction.

(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

* The destination of JMP instruction is beyond SP instruction.

(Cause) An SP instruction was encountered before a JMPE instruction.

- The range controled by COM instruction is beyond CALL instruction.

(Cause) A CALL instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

. The range controled by COM instruction is beyond CALLU instruction.

(Cause) A CALLU instruction was encountered before a COME instruction.

- The destination of JMPB instruction is beyond COM instruction.

(Cause) An attempt was made to execute the JMPB instruction from the outside to the

inside, or from the inside to the outside, of common line control.

* JMPC instruction cannot be used in the main program.

(Cause) The use of the JMPC instruction was attempted within the main program.

. An illegal label number is specified for the JMPB instruction.

(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the JMPB

instruction.

* An illegal label number is specified for the LBL instruction.

(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the LBL instruction.

- An illegal label number is specified for the JMPC instruction.

(Cause) A non-L address has been specified as the parameter of the JMPC

instruction.

A3-18




6.6Path 2/warning

001 * Unreferenced subprogram Pxxxx.

(Cause) A subprogram which is not called by a CALL or CALLU instruction is

encountered.

6.7 Path 2/error

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

* Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment )

(Cause) The total size of the message, symbol, and comment data exceeds the

predetermined limit.

* Data too large. ( ladder + step sequence )

(Cause) The total size of the ladder and step sequence data exceeds the

predetermined limit.

- Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment + ladder + step sequence )

(Cause) The total size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and step sequence

data exceeds the predetermined limit.

* The number of label exceeds the limit. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )

(Cause) The total number of labels used within LEVELl, LEVEL2, or LEVEL3 exceeds

the predetermined limit.

* The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )

(Cause) An identical L address is specified for two or more labels in LEVELl, LEVEL2,

or LEVELB.

* Program exists beyond END inctruction. ( Pxxx.#LA )

(Cause) A program including an END instruction is followed by another program.

- There is no label of Lxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )

(Cause) The destination label of JMPC cannot be found in LEVEL2.#LA.

* The label of Lxxxx exists in the COM mode. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA )

(Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found between COM and COME.

- The label of Lxxxx to refer exists in another level. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA )

(Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found in LEVELl.#LA or LEVEL3.#LA.

- There is no subprogram Pxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA )

(Cause) The subprogram to be called by CALL or CALLU cannot be found or is empty.

A3-19




7. INPUT AND OUTPUT

Message

INVALID RECEIVE DATA

TIME OUT ERROR


- Data other than IS0 codes was sent.

- During reception processing, a command was sent

from the PC, but there was no response within a

certain period of time. Confirm for the receiving

side that the power is on, settings are correct,

cables are properly connected, parameters (baud

rate and stop bits) are correct, and that

CONFIG.SYS is correct.

‘xxxx.DAT’ file format error.

4it any key

VOT EXIST APPOINT ROM FORM

=lLE

- No xxx.DAT files exist in the directory containing

FAPT LADDER. Install the system again.

- Specified ROM format file does not exist on the

disk [write and verification for the ROM writer,

download and comparison for the PMC].

ALREADY EXIST FILE

- Specified file already exists [read operation for the

3JPERSCRlPTlON REAL FILE? (Y/N)

ROM writer, upload or the PMC]. To overwrite,

enter “Y”. To change the name of the file, enter

“N”.

3OW PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT

-ILE

- There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified

ROM format file [write operation for the ROM

writer].

3OM PARITY WARNING OF

4PPOINT FILE. CONTINUE TO

TRANSFER? (Y/N)


ROM format file [download for the PMC]. To

download in this state, enter “Y”. To cancel, enter

“N”.

3OM PARITY WARNING OF

APPOINT FILE


ROM format file [read operation for the ROM writer,

upload for the PMC).

NAITING FOR RECEIVE. WHEN TO

- No data was received during transmission [read

STOP. PUSH BREAK KEY

operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC].

Press the break key to interrupt processing, then

check cable connections and the power supply, etc.

of the sending side.

NITIALIZE EXECUTE - Work file is being created during upload from PMC

(PMC-N).

- Checking ROM data parity [write operation for the

ROM writer, download for the PMCJ. Wait while

processing is performed.

4OM ID UNMATCH ERROR

- Inserted cassette or module is incorrect for the

present machine type (PMC-N, 431.

:ILE OPEN ERROR

- Cannot open specified ROM format file.

:ILE CLOSE ERROR

- Cannot close specified ROM format file.

‘ILE WRITE ERROR - Cannot write to specified ROM format file.

A3-20




Message


I

ILE READ ERROR

I

- Cannot read from specified ROM format file.

ROM FILE > ROM ERROR

I-

- During writing, the specified ROM format file could

not be fully written to ROM (cassette or module).

I

OM FILE FORMAT ERROR

I

ROM file format is incorrect.

WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR - There is not enough space on the disk for the work

file area (512K bytes) [PMC-N].

ROM SET ERROR

EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR

IWIIT.5

- EROM is installed with incorrect orientation.

- EROM is faulty.

- Cannot write to EROM because it has not yet been

erased.

- EROM has not yet been erased.

DATA SEND ERROR - The number of the sent data items does not match

that of the received data items.

PARITY ERROR

- A parity error occurred during data transfer.

RUNNING WRITER ERROR - The ROM writer is being used.

ROW TYPE ERROR

PORT ERROR (OVER RUN)

PORT ERROR (PARITY)

- Incorrect type of ROM

- Overrun (determined by the status check

information from I/O ports)

- Parity error (determined by the status check


I

ORT ERROR (FRAMING)

- Framing error (determined by the status check


I

ORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT)

- Break interrupt error (determined by the status

check information from I/O ports)

- Time-out error (determined by the status check


- Data transfer error (determined by the status check

information from l/O ports)

~

IMER SET/CANCEL ERROR

- The system timer malfunctions. Update the text file

(FL10 AT.DAT) information. For details, see the

comments of the file.

A3-21




8. MNEMONIC EDITING

8.1 Mnemonic Editing (System Parameters >

Message

Invalid qualifier.


- System parameter is followed by invalid

character(s).

Unknown data number.

- Data number was specified that does not exist in

the system parameters.

Illegal value.

Out of value.

- System parameter contains invalid numerical data.

- System parameter contains out-of-bound numerical

data.

Expected a multiple of 5.

Expected a multiple of 2.

- System parameter required to be a multiple of 5 is

not a multiple of 5.

- System parameter required to be a multiple of 2 is

not a multiple of 2.

Illegal character(s).

Data not found.

Too many characters in 1 line.

- System parameter contains invalid character(s).

- There is no system parameter data.

- System parameter contains a line of data that

exceeds the maximum allowed number of

characters.

Illegal data number.

Too long strings.

Illegal address

Expected parameter(s)

Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER)

Proceed to discompile using ‘NO’.

- System parameter contains invalid data number(s).

- System parameter contains character data that

exceeds the maximum length.

- System parameter contains an invalid address.

- System parameter is missing or incomplete.

- As OP.PANEL (parameter) of the system

parameters is invalid, it is assumed to be “NO”

and operation continues.

A3-22




8.2 Mnemonic Editing <Title Data B

Message

Invalid qualifier.

Unknown data number.

Too long strings.

Include KANA or KANJI character(s).

Illegal character(s)

Data not found.



- Title data is followed by invalid character(s).

- Specified data identifier number does not exist.

- Length of title data exceeded the maximum length.

- Title data contains m-type characters.

- Title data contains invalid character data.

- There is no title data.

- Title data contains a line of data that exceeds the

maximum allowed number of characters.

Illegal title number. - Data identifier number specified is incorrect.

8.3 Mnemonic Editing (Symbol and Comment Data >

Message

SYMBOL data not found.

Invalid qualifier.



- Comment data exists, but there is no symbol data.

- Symbol and comment data is followed by invalid

character(s).

- Invalid character data was specified in symbol and

comment data.

Illegal address. - Invalid address was specified in symbol and

comment data.

Redefinition of address data.

- Symbol and comment data contain identical

address data.

Redefinition of symbol data. - Mnemonic symbol data contains identical symbol

data.

Include KANA or KANJI character(s) in

- Comment data which contains m-type characters

comment data. was converted without the m-type character

conversion option (J option).

Data not found.

Too long characters in 1 line.

- There is no symbol or comment data.

- Symbol or comment data contains a line of data

that exceeds the maximum allowed number of

characters.

Comment data not found.

Symbol or comment data not found.

- Only symbol data was converted for the address.

- Only symbol or comment data was converted for

the address.

Out of address limits.

- Mnemonic data contains an address that is out of

bounds.

A3-23




8.4 Mnemonic Editing (LADDER Data >

Message


Expected address.

- Basic command has no address.

invalid qualifier. - LADDER data is followed by invalid character(s).

Expected parameter(s). - Function instruction has no parameters.

Not enough parameter(s). - Function instruction is missing parameters.

Too many parameters.

- Function instruction has too many parameters.

Illegal address.

- Unspecifiable address was specified.

Out of address limits.

- Out-of-bound address was specified.

Undefined instruction.

- Data contains an undefined command.

Invalid function’s name. - Unspecifiable function instruction was specified.

Cannot specify byte address on basic

- Byte address was specified in a basic command.

instruction.

Cannot specify the input address with - Address which cannot be output was specified in a

coil. coil.

Cannot specify the odd address. - Odd address was specified for an address that

cannot be odd.

Illegal value of parameter.

- Numeric parameter of a function instruction

contains an incorrect value.

Dut of parameter value. - Numeric parameter of a function instruction

contains a value that exceeds the maximum.

Cannot specify bit address of

oarameter.

Cannot specify the input address.

- Bit address was specified in the byte address

parameter of a function instruction.

- Address which cannot be output was specified for

the output address parameter of a function

instruction.

Cannot specify the address prohibited

- Address which cannot be specified as a parameter

Jsing as parameter.

was specified as a function instruction address

parameter.

llegal address of parameter. - Invalid address was specified in a function

instruction address parameter.

llegal value of parameter.

- Invalid value was specified in the function

instruction data table.

3ut of value in data table.

- Out-of-bound value was specified in the function

instruction data table.

_ogical product remains in register(s).

- LADDER data contains a register which is not

output.

_ogical operated with unused

- Operation was performed with a register which was

,egister(s).

not input in LADDER data.

A3-24




Message

Not enough control condition(s).


- Function instruction control conditions are

insufficient.

Too many control conditions.

Expected control condition(s).

Data not found.

Unexpected address.

Unexpected parameter(s).

Unexpected control condition(s).

Unexpected coil(s).


- Too many function instruction control conditions.

- There are no function instruction control conditions.

- There is no LADDER data.

- Address was specified in a section that does not

require an address.

- Parameter was specified for a function instruction

that does not require parameters.

- Basic command was specified for a function

instruction that does not require control conditions.

- Coil was specified for a function instruction that

does not require coils.

- Mnemonic data contains a line of characters that

exceeds that maximum allowed number of

characters.

3ut of address limits of parameter.

- Function instruction parameter contains an out-of-

bound address.

llegal address in data table.

- Function instruction data table contains an invalid

address.

3ut of address limits in data table.

- Function instruction data table contains an out-of-

bound address.

A3-25



APPENDIX 3

ERROR MESSAGES

8.5

Mnemonic Editing <Message Data>

Message

Too long strings.

Illegal address.

Include KANA or KANJI character(s).

Invalid qualifier.

Data not found.



- Length of message data exceeds the maximum

allowed length.

- Invalid address was specified for the message

setting address.

- Message data contains m-type characters.

- Message data is followed by invalid character(s).

- There is no message data.

- Message data contains a line of characters that


characters.

Out of address limits of address. - Message setting address contains an out-of-bound

address.


Not found data at $ address.

- Message data contains invalid character data.

- Mnemonic message data was not specified. Only

mnemonic address data was specified.

Cannot convert in case of specified - Specified machine type and data machine type do

PMC series.

not agree.

A3-26




8.6 Mnemonic Editing <I/O Module Data>

Message

Invalid qualifier.

Illegal address.


- I/O module data is followed by invalid character(s).

- Invalid address specified for l/O module data

address.

Out of address limits. - Out-of-bound address specified for I/O module data

address.

Not found group data.

Illegal value in group data.

- l/O module data has no group data.

- Group data of I/O module data contains an invalid

value.

Out of value in group data.

- Group data of I/O module data contains an out-of-

bound value.

Not found base data.

811egal alue in base data.

- l/O module data has no base data.

- Base data of I/O module data contains an invalid

value.

Dut of value in base data. - Base data of l/O module data contains an out-of-

bound value.

Vat found slot data.

llegal value in slot data.

- I/O module data has no slot data.

- Slot data of l/O module data contains an invalid

value.

3ut of value in slot data. - Slot data of I/O module data contains an out-of-

bound value.

\lot found module name.

- I/O module data has no module name.

nvalid module name.

- I/O module data has an invalid module name.

Cannot specify output module at input

- Output module is specified at the input address of

Iddress.

the l/O module data.

Cannot specify input module at output

- Input module is specified at the output address of

address.

the I/O module data.

2annot specify same group, base and

- Group, base, and slot data of I/O module data have

;lot.

the same data.

rot.9 value of base and slot is over.

- Sum of base and slot data of I/O module data

exceeds the maximum allowed value.

Data not found.


- There is no I/O module data.

- I/O module data contains a line of characters that


characters.

2annot convert in case of specified

- Specified machine type and conversion data

‘MC series.

machine type do not agree.

A3-27




9. STEP SEQUENCE EDITING ERRORS

Error message

Illegal source code

Symbol file read error

Comment file read error

Title file read error

Memory allocation error

Insufficient disk space

Buffer size over

Number of nest branch too big

Number of branch too big

Size of table buffer too big

Unconnected step sequence diagram

Selected branch error

Parallel branch error

Syntax error

Step line syntax error

Transition line syntax error

Cannot insert

Cannot make diagram

Horizontal fine illegal

Description

The input file data is illegal.

The symbol data cannot be read.

The comment data cannot be read.

The title data cannot be read.

Sufficient memory space cannot be allocated.

There is insufficient free space on the specified drive.

The program is too large.

The program contains too many branches.



A line is not connected.



A syntax error is found.

A step line contains an illegal code.

A transition line contains an illegal code.


The wrong soft key was pressed to change an

element.

The point at which a branch must be closed is left as

a horizontal line.

Jump forward check error

The jump destination cannot be found.

File open error

The specified file cannot be found.

File close error The file cannot be closed.

Check incomplete error

The source program contains an illegal code.

Chart sequence error

The sequence is incorrect.

Chart start code error

The beginning of the sequence is incorrect.

Chart end code error

The end of the sequence is incorrect.

Jump close error

An instruction is encountered after a label jump.

-horizontal line duplicate error

The sequence is incorrect.

3ranch unconnected error

A branch is not closed.

3ranch sequence error A branch is invalid.

A3-28




Error message

Description

Cannot copy diagrams


Cannot move diagrams

Illegal specified position


The corresponding coordinates cannot be found.

Strings not Found

Step Number Duplicate Error

The specified character string cannot be found.

The specified step number is being used by another

subprogram.

Label Number Duplicate Error

Cannot delete temporary file

Same sub-program name exists

The specified label is used in two or more positions.

The temporary file cannot be deleted.

A file having the same name, but a different extension,

exists.

I

nput invarid

The specified address data exceeds the


Expected address

Sub-program of nest branch too big

No subprogram number is specified.

An attempt was made to nest a program to a level of

eight or more, by using the [ZOOM] key.

A3-29



APPENDIX 4

APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING

(PMC=RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

MODULAR PROGRAMMING

(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

The PMCRA3/RB3’RC3 has special sub-program functions that allow modular programming.

When the sub-program function is used, a Ladder program, which must have been coded as an

unbroken sequence before, can be coded in units of sub-programs.

The sub-program function enables FAPT LADDER to manage a program by dividing it into two or

more modules (modular programming.)

The modular programming is accomplished by the

module from a program and connect a module to a

modules.

ladder diagram editing function to produce a

program and the compile function to connect

In the later part of this book, the terms “module” and “source program” mean the following:

0 Module

: Logical unit of a program. A module does not always correspond to a sub-

program. A single module can be the first or

or a group of sub-programs.

Source program

: Physical unit of a program stored on a floppy

second half of the main program

disk or hard disk

1. LADDER DIAGRAM EDITING FUNCTION

(1) Dividing a source program

The function copies or moves a part of a source program and creates another program, to

which a name is specified.

0 The function produces a module from a program.

Source program

Module

A4-1





(2) Combining source programs

The function combines all or part of a source program to another source program that is

being edited.

The function combines a module (program) to another program.

Source program

Module

For the details of (1) and (2), see (8) “Copying

5.1.2, “Ladder Diagram Editing.”

Source program

*..*

_....

.

*

Edit .

<.....

..’

. ..*.

.

Sections of a Sequence

Source program

Program” in Section

2. COMPILE FUNCTION

(1) Combining modules

The function compiles a batch of separately edited programs and unites the programs.

0 The files to be combined can be specified in a control statement (text file having the

extension #LS).

0 The control statement is coded by the [LIST] command on the compile or print screen.

0 The function can handle modules (files) made up of any units (nets or sub-programs).

Control statement

(MAINFILE.#LS)

MAINFILE.#LA 1 Main program 1

I

I

1 I

SUBFILEl.#LA 1 Sub-program 1 1

,

SUBFILE2.#LA I Sub-program 2 I

I

I

File selection

MAINFILE

SUBFILEI

SUBFILE

.

SUBFlLEn

.

.

SUBFILEn.#LA

ROM data

Main program

I

Sub-program 1 1

Sub-program 2 1

.

.

Sub-program n 1

For details, see Section 5.3, “Compilation.”

A4-2



(2)

Control statement (.#LS file)

The .#LS file is a MS-DOS text file in which the source programs to be combined are coded in

the order in which they are combined. See the following example.

Sample control statement (File name = MAIN.#LS)

~

Parameters, symbols, comments, the title, and other data, except data for the ladder, from the

first program are used for the second and later programs.

(3)

Advantages



0 Programs can be edited quickly and easily because small source programs are handled.

0 A source program in the control statement can be used for another purpose only by

changing its name.

Program

1

Program 2

ESub-program

A4-3



APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FSZO)

APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE

(FOR THE FS20)

This appendix describes how to use the BOOT SYSTEM for the FS20. The operating procedure

varies from one CNC model to another. For other models such as the FSlSB (PMC-NA), refer to

the respective manuals.

AS-1



APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FSZO)

r (NEXT]

Hold down the [NEXT] key and a soft key

at its immediate left simultaneously, and

switch on the NC. The IPL screen will

appear (00).

The entry procedure is described below

(0 to 0).

@ Hold dowrf both simultaneously.

@ Switch on the power.

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

'liB:i';~~f~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,

2. SYSTEM'DATA CHECK

3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE

*** MESSAGE **

SELECT

MODE

AND HIT [SELECT]

KEY

[SELECT] [ YES I[ ~0 11 up

1 [

DOWN ]

@ Place the cursor on ” 1. SYSTEM

DATA LOADING” using [UP] or

[DOWN], then press [SELECT].

B

'SYSTEM DATA LOADING

Place the cursor on the

FILE DIRECTORY

~~~~~~~~

desired filename using TEST. DAT “’

[UP] or [DOWN], then END

press [SELECT].

***

MESSAGE **

SELECT FILE AND HIT [SELECT] KEY

=-I

SELECT] [ YES 1 [ ~0 1 [ up 1 [ DOWN 1

0 Press [YES] or [NO].

I

I

t

I

-

Cy

1

** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT [YES] OR [NO] KEY.

(SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

I

I

/

I

I

*** MESSAGE ***

HIT [SELECT] KEY.

ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE

[SELECT]

I

YES I[ NO ]I UP

I[

DOWN

]

A file in a format that cannot be

was selected.

End of entry

:\ j

I

handled by the BOOT SYSTEM -

LOADING COMPLETE. HIT [SELECT] KEY.

[SELECT] [ YES I[ NO I[ up

I[

DOWN

1

AS-2



APPENDIX 6

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY

(FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY

(FOR THE PMGRAlIRA3, NB, AND QC)

If a CNC or off-line programmer operating on an upgraded edition is used to output a sequence

program to a memory card, the sequence program may not be able to be input to a

CNC

or off-line

programmer operating on an earlier edition (see below).

Series 4080, edition 06




CNC

Off-line programmer

A08B-XXXX-J502, editions 06.3 and later

A08B-XXXX-J501, editions 06.2 and later

AO8B-XXXX-J502, editions 06.1 and later

: Operating on an upgraded edition

f- -+ : Unconditionally possible

+___ ___+

: Possible under some condition

: Operating on an earlier edition

Cases 0, 0, 0, and 0, where input/output is possible under some condition, are explained

below.

A6-1



APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY

(FOR THE PMGRAVRA3, NB, AND QC)

Cases 0 and @

output :

No special operation is required.

Input :

Use the BOOT SYSTEM to enter a sequence program.

Case 0

Output :

To output a sequence program, specify the output format as 1 (S-format) on the

PMC l/O SETUP screen shown below. Note that for the output format, the default

value (put in effect by pressing soft key [INIT]) is 0 (binary).

PMC I/O PROGRAM

CHANNEL = 1

DEVICE

= M-CARD

~~~~4~~~1 _ "RITE

DATA KIND = LADDER

FILE NO. =

( #NAME )

MONIT STOP

[ EXEC l[CANCEL][WRITE ][ READ ](COMPARJ

Input :

Case @

output :

Input :

[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT][

I [SETUP ]

PMC SETUP M-CARD

MONIT STOP

:.,..,.......i

OUTPUT FORhfAT(pROGRAM) +$$:_ii;

(O:BINARY,l:S-FORMAT)

[INPUT ] [

II

I[

1 [ INIT 1

To enter a sequence program, select F6 (input/output), then F3 (Handy File &

memory card) from the main menu screen.

Output a sequence program to a memory card by selecting F6 (input/output), then

F4 (FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER & Handy File) from the main menu.

Select F6 (input/output), then F5 (memory card) from the main menu; a sequence

program can be read as usual.

A6-2



APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE 0:s

APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S

(1) MS-DOS version 05.0

@ DOSKEY.COM

When DOSKEY.COM is used in insertion mode, pay attention to the following:

Insert mode specification

DOSKEY.COM/INSERT

Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a command line of

DOSKEY.COM.

When DOSKEY.COM is used in insert mode on the PC-9801, the symptom described

below occurs.

When an attempt is made to move the cursor to “3) Select conversion data type”

on the “conversion to mnemonic” screen, the cursor disappears, but the desired

data type is selected normally.

This symptom does not occur on the IBM/PC or compatible.

[Measure]

Use DOSKEY.COM in replace mode.

(2) Windows 3.1

0 SMARTDRV.EXE

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following:

Enable write caching SMARTDRV.EXE

Be careful especially when the AUTOEXEC.BAT contains a command line of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, the following symptom occurs.

The following alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling

entry.

Alarm message : “Received data invalid”

(for the PC-9801)

“OVERRUN”

(for the IBM/PC and compatible)

[Measure]

When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:

a.

Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists

b.

Drive where ROM format files are created

A7-1







This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing the message data incorporating sequence

program of FANUC PMCs .

This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.

The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data, if both message data

size are the same.

This tool is usefull when it is necessary to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For

example: Supporting multi-lingual message.)

c Method of Message size Check >

(1) Memory map information is output when the source program is compiled.

Please check each symbol top address of the original changing ladder and the ladder for

changing to be the same value.

(2) This tool for changing the message data execute with the “compare file”, then this tool

execute the same check of the message data size.

c Applied PMCs >

FANUC PMC-MODEL RAlIRA2 RA3iRB/RB2/RB3/RBWRC/RC3/RC4/NB

1. PROCEDURE OF THE MESSAGE DATA CHANGING

(1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the memory card or

floppy disk on the PMC input output operation ([I/O] screen).

(2) Input the “CHGMES” command with the message data for changing and dummy ladder

file(handy file format).

(3) The message data on the NC is changed by loading the output file of this tool on the PMC

input/output operation ([I 01 screen).

2. OPERATING ENVIRONMENT

It is necessary to use following operating environment for this tool.

(1) Memory

235Kbytes or more main memory is required when activating this function without FAPT

LADDER.

(2) Temporary files

This function generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which

is set by environmental variable “TMP” of PC-DOS.

This function generate temporary files on the route directory of current drive when

environmental variable “TMP” is not set.

It is necessary to free max.65KBytes disk space for these temporary files.

$TMPD.T-‘, $TMPW.T”

(“= 00-99)

(These temporary files are deleted by this function automatically.)

A8-1




(3) Hard disk

It is necessary to use following disk space.

For installation

To generate temporary files

(In case of environmental variable “TMP”

of PC-DOS set on hard disk)

68KBytes

65KBytes

TOTAL 133KBytes

3. INSTALLATION

Please copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy

disk(Vol.3).

Key in ‘I_

CHGMES” on the installed directory, then following files are generated.

* CHGMES.EXE * ASC2lMG.EXE * IMG2ASC.EXE : Execute files (.EXE)

* RB3DUMMY.SFM * RB3BASIC.SFM * RB3MES.SFM : example files(.SFM)

Example files(.SFM) are used to confirm the installation of this function by activating example

command.

4. ACTIVATION

Key in following command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main

menu).

Or,Please change the directory in which this tool is installed.

(It is not necessary to change the directory when the “PATH”‘is set.)

Then key in following command.

CHGMES [INPUT FILE] [OUTPUT FILE] [PMC TYPE] ( [COMPARE FILE] ) <return>

INPUT FILE : :

OUTPUT FILE : :

PMC TYPE : :

COMPARE FILE : :

(Optional)

A handy file format file that consists of a dummy ladder and message data

to replace the message data in the basic message ladder file.

Create this file by compiling the source file and converting to a handy file

format file using FAPT LADDER.

A handy file format message file created by this tool.

This file contains only message data.

By loading this file to the CNC, message data in the CNC memory can be

substituted.

PMC TYPE (RAl or RA2 or RA3...etc.)

Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined <Applied PMCs> item.

Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs.

Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

Please refer to the Fig.“Operation outline”.

This tool compares message size of the “INPUT FILE” and the

“COMPARE FILE” to determine if there is a match. Then, you can

guarantee that only the message will be correctry replaced without

crashing other data when you load the ‘OUTPUT FILE’ to CNC.

A8-2




<Outline of Operation 7

Basic message ladder

Message for changing + Dummy ladder

+ Generation, Editing +

t

+

I

Check the SYMBOL top

COMPILATION

address by memory map

+,

+,

display.

J

t

INPUT/OUTPUT (F4:FLOPPY CASSETTE Handy File)

Handy file format

ROM file

FLOPPY

MEMORY CARD

Handy file format

(Note)

%l

%2 %3

%2

FLOPPY MEMORY CARD

(Note)

r/ r]ORu

Only message data for changing of ROM file

Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC.

(Note)

It is possible to load by memory card only for FS16 -B, FS18-B, FS-20, FS21-B, and

FSl5-B (PMC-NB).

Please refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory

card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.

FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PA3/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RBURC/RC3/RCWNB

PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863EI06)

A8-3




5. USING EXAMPLE

Check the installation of this function by using the following example.

There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking this function.

RB3DUMMY.SFM : : Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format)

(Message data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + END2))

RB3BASIC.SFM : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format)

(Message data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment data)

RB3MESSFM

: : Data for checking the result (Message data(50KB))

(1)

(2)

(3)

(This file is a normal output file, when this tool execute for above

sample data. It is possible to check result by comparing “OUTPUT

FILE” and this file.)

Execute as the following (In this case the system is installed in main

body.)

Please key in the following command.

A: y 7 CHGMES RB3DUMMY.SFM USERTEST.SFM RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return 7

You can specify any name for “OUTPUT FILE”.ln this example,“USERTEST.SFM” is used.

Following file is generated on current drive.

USERTESTSFM (Message data (50KB))

Check the result by using “FC/A”(PC-DOS COMMAND).

A: Y 7 FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM

If “NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED” is displayed, the result is correct.

6. ERROR MESSAGES

Message

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (pmc type)

Meaning and countermeasure

PMC type does not match between applied

PMCs.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (input file)

PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do

not match.

chgmes : PMC type unmatch (compare file)

PMC type of compare file and key in PMC

type do not match.

chgmes : Message sizes of (input file) and

(compare file) are mismatched

Message size of input file and compare file do

not agree. Please adjust the message size by

adding some dummy message to the input

file. Please confirm the MAP display on the

compile function of FAPT LADDER.

chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG ASC2lMG.EXE does not exist in the same

directory of CHGMES.EXE.

A8-4




Message

chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC

Meaning and countermeasure

IMG2ASC.EXE does not exist in the same

directory of CHGMESEXE.

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file

$tmpd.t”

chgmes : Cannot make temporary file

$tmwd.t”

chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t*

It is impossible to make temporary file.

* Disk is insufficient.

- It is impossible to set the file name, because

$tmp*.tOO -$tmp*.t99 exist.

Temporary file can not be closed.

Please check the disk space.

ssc2img : Cannot allocate memory (“bytes)

Memory is insufficient. Please

free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate.

ssc2img : Conversion area in input is

zonflicted

asc2img : Unknown file type

Ladder header of the input file is crushed.

Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.

Illegal format of the input file. Please change

the format, and re-activate.

asc2img : (input file) : Record No.” has There is an invalid data of input file.

Please correct as error message, and

reactivate.

3sc2img : Cannot open file

Isc2img : Cannot close file

There is no input file.

It is impossible to close the file.


Isc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file.


mg2asc : Cannot allocate memory (“bytes)

Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate.

mg2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file.


A8-5



APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE


VERSION TABLE

To use the software described in this manual, each CNC unit requires a different system disk.

As described in Section 2.1 in Part I, each system must prepare an area of 3 Mbytes in its hard

disk. If software products of specific versions listed below are used, however, they can be stored

in the same directory and can be operated.

When the software products of specific versions are stored in one directory, the required capacity

of hard disk is a little more than 3 Mbytes. in addition, any PMC model can be selected just by

moving the cursor on the model selection screen.

1) System floppy disks of different versions that can be used together

Software

Combinations of different versions that can

(-Jxxx) be entered into an identical directory

PMC-FIB/FE Ol.O- 03.0- 04.0- 06.1

06.2 06.3 06.4 07.0-

(-J502) 02.0 03.6 06.0

08.4

PMC-N -

Ol.l- 03.0- - 04.0- -

05.0 06.1

06.2 06.3 -

(-J501) 02.3 03.1 04.8

PMC-L/M/P Ol.l- 02.0- 03.0 - 04.0- -

05.0 06.1 06.2 06.3 -

(-J500) 01.12 02.3 04.8

A9-1




2) System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FS16/18/15B,Powe Mate-D, F-D Mate Mini

that can be used together

software

(-Jxxx)

Combinations of versions

‘MC-RB/RC 01.0 02.0 03.0-03.6 04.0- 05.0- 06.1 06.2- 08.0- 08.3-

(-J502) 04.2 06.0 07.1 08.1 08.4

?Al/RA2 MODULE - 01.0 02.0 02.1 03.0- 04.0 04.1 04.2- 05.0 05.1

PMCRAl/RA2/RA3 03.4 04.4

PA1 /PA3)

(-J603)

IB/RC MODULE 01.0 02.0 03.0 03.1- 04.0- 04.5 04.7 04.8- 06.0 06.1

PMCRB/RB2/RB3 03.2 04.4 04.6 05.0

164/RC/RC3/RC4)

(-J604) (Note)

1C MODULE 01.0 01.1 01.2 02.0 02.1

(-J605)

JB MODULE 01.0 Ol.l- 02.0 02.1

(-J606) 01.2

Note) When using PMCRB4iRC4, install the RBI’RC MODULE floppy disk(-J604) at last of all

installation.

3)

System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FSO,Power Mate-ABC

Software

I -J I

Combinations of versions

PMC-L/M/P 500 01 .l -04.8 05.0 06.1 06.2 -06.3

L MODULE 600 01.1-02.0 03.0 04.0 05.0-06.0

M MODULE 601 01.1-03.0 04.0 05.0 06.0 -07.0

M (MMC) MODULE 602 01 .l -02.0 03.0 04.0 05.0-06.0

Note) The column entitled -JXXX indicates the last three characters of software code A08B-

9200/9201 -JXXX

A9-2




Software products listed in the same column can be stored in the same directory. When software

products to be stored in the same directory have the different version numbers, however, a

software product with a smaller number must be installed first. The following are examples:

1) Software products J502iO3.0 and JSOliO4.3 can be stored in the same directory. However,

J502/03.0

must be installed first.

2) Software products J502 03.0 and J501/03.0 cannot be stored in the same directory.

A9-3



APPENDIX IO MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

APPENDIX IO MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

1. TYPE OF SOURCE PROGRAM

There are two types of the source program of the following.

The file name and the control method are different though both are preserved as some files.

Especially, the function of ZOOM and G-SRCH can not be used at FORMAT-A but FORMAT-B.

1) FORMAT-A

The source program is managed using the following names. A single directory can contain two

or more source programs.

- xxxxxxxx.#CN :

File managing user programs

- xxxxxxxx.#PA :

File storing system parameters

- xxxxxxxx.#TA : File storing the title data

- xxxxxxxx.#sY :

File storing symbols

- xxxxxxxx.#c1 :

File storing comments

- xxxxxxxx.#c2 : File storing comments (reserve)

- xxxxxxxx.#ME :

File storing messages

- xxxxxxxx.#l0 :

File storing the I/O module data

- xxxxxxxx.#LA : File storing ladder

(xxxxxxxx is the specified source program name.)

2) FORMAT-B

A directory is created with the specified source program name. In the directory, the program is

managed under the following names. A single directory cannot contain two or more source

programs.

- CONTROL : File managing the source program

- SYSPARAM

: File storing system parameters

- TITLE

: File storing the title data

- SYMBOL : File storing symbols

- COMMENT1

: File storing comments

- COMMENT2 : File storing comments (reserve)

- MESSAGE : File storing messages

- IOMODULE : File storing the l/O module data

- LEVEL1 .#LA : File storing ladder of the first level

- LEVEL2.#LA : File storing ladder of the second level

- LEVEL3.#LA

: File storing ladder of the third level

- PYYYYY.#LA

: File storing ladder subprograms

- PYYYYY #SS

: File storing step sequence subprograms

(yyyyy is a subprogram number.)

A10-1





APPENDIX 10 MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

3. SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OF FORMAT-C

The following functions have been added to PMCRB4RB4 (STEP SEQRCWRC4 (STEP SEQ.

The FORMAT-C source program is organized by below files.

<A case of specifying “C: y DATA y PRG C”

as source program >

-

C:Y

t

data Y

t

PRG CY

-CONTROL

- SYSPARAM

* TITLE

- XSYMBOL.xxx

- MESSAGE

- IOMODULE

* LEVEL1 #LA

* LEVEL2.#LA

* LEVELWLA

* Pyyy.#LA

- Pzzz.#SS

. NETCMT.xxx

* OPTION

- * MCARD

Source program managing file

System parameter data file

Title data file

Symbol & Comment data file

Message data file

I/O Module data file

First level ladder data file

Second level ladder data file

Third level ladder data file

Sub-program ladder data file

Sub-program step sequence data file

Net comment data file

Setting of option

Memory card syste file

(Note

1)

(Note 2)

(Note 3)

(Note 3)

(Note 1)

(Notel)

(Note2)

(Note3)

‘xxx’ is number of multi file managing.

Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMCRC4IRC4(STEP).

‘yyy’, ‘zzz’ is number of sub-program.

The format

of newly created source program is specified by ‘%%%FLSET.CNF data file. The

initial settings for RB4 RB4(STEP)/RC4/RC4(STEP) are FORMAT-C.

Data file name : %%%FLSET.CNF

7;

Source program type

kB4

3;

RB4 STEP :3;

RC4- =3;

RC4_STEP = 3;

Parameters’ value

‘1’ = FORMAT-A

‘3’ = FORMAT-C (initial setting)

A10-3



APPENDIX

10

MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

4. SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE AND PMC MODEL

The source program type is decided by setting the PMC model.

1) FORMAT-A.

- PMCRC/RC3’RBiRB2/RB3.:RAl/RA2/RA3

- PMC-NBQC

* PMCPAl PA3

*

PMC-N’N (10 LINK)/QA

- PMC-L’MIM (MMC)

- PMC-RB4/RC4(A08B-9200/9201 -Jr502 ver.8.0 or earlier)

2) FORMAT-B

- PMCRB4 (STEP SEQ)/RC4 (STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver. 8.1, 8.2, 8.3)

- PMC-RB4/RC4 (A08B-9200 9201-J502 ver.8.0, 8.2, 8.3)

3) FORMAT-C

-

PMCRB4.‘RB4 (STEP SEQ)IRCWRC4(STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver 8.4 or later)

* PMC-RBMRBG NB2

Note) In case of PMCRBWRC4, FAPT LADDER creates two types of source program as above

mentioned. Therefore, the source program of ver.8.0 needs conversion for using on

ver.8.1.

For the operation of conversion refer to next chapter “6.4 Conversion from FORMAT-A to

FORMAT-B”

A10-4



APPENDIX 10 MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

5. CONVERSION FROM FORMAT-A TO FORMAT-B

When FAPT LADDER for PMC-RB4iRC4(A08B-9200 9201-J502) is updated from ver.8.0 or earlier

to ver.8.1 or later, it needs source program conversion.

The operation is the following.

1) Convert the source program “FORMAT-A” into an all-format mnemonic data with FAPT

LADDER(A08B-9200 9201-J502) ver.8.1 or later.

2) Convert the mnemonic data into a source program with the same FAPR LADDER.

The conversion is completed by above mentioned.

In case of using a control statement file, which has extension

“.#I.$‘, for combining modules, the

operation is the following.

- Do the operation of 1) by each source program in the control statement.

- Combine each mnemonic data into an all-format mnemonic data.

- Do the operation of 2).

Note) It is possible to use FORMAT-A without conversion. In that case, you need to modify a

“%%%FLSET.CNF”. But it is not recommended.

For the

“%%%FLSET.CNF” refer to the “APPENDIX 7 System configuration file

“%%%FLSET.CNF”.

6. COPYING AND MOVING A SOURCE PROGRAM

FAPT LADDER does not support a function to enable the copying or moving of a source program.

Because the source program is managed as described above, it can be copied or moved by using

file manipulation on a specified directory with the COPY or another MS-DOS command. Only

programs for an identical model can be handled in this way.

For example, to make a backup copy on floppy disk of the source program shown above, enter the

following command at the MS-DOS prompt:

1) Suppose that the floppy disk drive is B:.

2) Create a source program storage directory on B:.

A > MKDIR B: +r BACKUP [RET]

3) Copy all files under the directories specified with the source program name.

The source program is copied.

To edit the copied source program, start FAPT LADDER and specify B:Y BACKUP as the source

program name.

A10-5



APPENDIX

11

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%%FLSET.CNF”.

APPENDIX 11

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET.

CNF”.

“%%%FLSET.CNF” is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by

of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there.

The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed.

And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.

1. Sample of “%%%FLSET.CNF”

which the behavior

;IIIII=t trrfllll’llllllltlll’1111111111111110

IPttLtllLlDlttPOltt=It

:

FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File

t

( 'key word =' <= Scharactets )

;rPlrllLIIDl====ltll

IILDIIIILrt=rlllllPL-======-=

Illll'llttllllltlll=

f

:

=t=tff== System Setup ====t===

:

editor =;

Text Editor

:

ladkey = 1;

Ladder editing key buffer size

;

( 1 <= ladkey <- 16 )

:

password=O; 0:No password

:

l:Password(R/W)and(R)

f

2:Password(R/W)

;

3:Password(R)

i

:

===f==== Utility Information ==t====

:

N = UTILITY;

Utility Guidance

i

Fl

= DOS /

command.com;

F2 = file List / ISCREENZ;

F3 = flOadat / FLOADAT;

F4 =;

F5 =;

F6 =;

F7 =;

F =;

F9 =;

FlO=;

[Fl] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

[FZ] Soft Key Guidance h EXE

(F3) Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

[F4] Soft Key Guidance L EXE

[FSJ Soft Key Guidance C EXE

[F6] Soft Key Guidance h EXE

[F7] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

[FE]

Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

[F9] Soft Key Guidance & EXE

[FlO] Soft Key Guidance 6 EXE

i

:

*T;

======== Source program type r=======

.

LB4

'2;

'1' or '2'.

RB4_STEP=2;

PMC+B4(STEP SEQ) only supports

RC4

'2;

'1' or '2'.

RC4_STEP=2;

PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) only supports

'2'.

'2'.

i

IEOFI

All-l



APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET.CNF”.

All parameters in the “%%%FLSET.CNF” are described following the form of “key word = “.

Hereafter, content of setting parameters is explained by each item.

1) Specification of source program type

a)

W

Function

FAPT LADDER will newly create the source program at “conversion of mnemonic ->

source”,

“editing new source program” and “decompilation”.

The type of created source program is decided at this time.

key word

By each PMC model, a setting parameter will be described succeeding the line of ‘I* T;

=========

Source program type = = = = = = = = “.

Key word shows the model and uses the same character string as the display of model

information on the status line displayed in each screen of FAPT LADDER.

This setting is effective only in case of Key word “RB4 = “,” RC4 = “.

As for the value, either

"1"

or “2” is effective.

_ . I w

1 = FORMAT-A

- “2”

= FORMAT-B

It is FORMAT-B in initialization. When the source program type is FORMAT-B, the function

of “ZOOM” and “G-SRCH” can be used.

All

-2





Comoanv name Section

Person in charqe Phone No. ( 1

Address

Fax No.

t )

FANUC

sales person

No.

Product name

Ordering code

2

3

4

5

[Usage environment]

Machine tvpe used (PC)

DOS MS-DOS

Version

(Manufacturer:

(Manufacturer:

EMS board:

Yes I No (Manufacturer:

1

Other equipment (printer, etc.) (Manufacturer:

1

Please print out the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form.

[Details of inquiry]

Please use this form when you have any questions about this product.

AlZ-1



INDEX

(PMC-RA~/RA~/RB~/RB~/RB~ RB~ RC~/RC~/NB NB~) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 99

A Program Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

ACTIVATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-15

<B>

BASICOPERATION ...............................................

l-17

Basic Operation

...................................................

3 - 6

BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20) ................ A5 - 1

BUSY

control

....................................................

2 - 4

<c>

CAUTIONS FOR USING THE O/S ............................. ........ A7 - 1

Changing Printer Output Format ............................. ......... 2 - 12

Changing the Order of Subprograms .............................. ....

l- 103

Changing the paper selection name

....................................

2 - 14


........................................

2 - 1

COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT .................. 2 - 1

Common System Operations

........................................

1 - 19

Communications settings

............................................

2 - 2

Compilation ..................................................... 1 - 94

Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program .......................

1 - 152

Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file .......................

l-150

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

.............................

2 - 8

Convert with signal address converter

...................................

2 - 9

Converting a step sequence program according to the model ................. 1 - 113

Converting by system parameter editing ........................... ....... 2 - 8

Creating a step sequence program

....................................

3 - 10

Creating a Step Sequence

...........................................

3 - 9

Creating a subprogram of the step sequence

..............................

3 - 9

Data conversion (return codes) .............................. .......... 2 - 5

DataFlow ............................... ........................ 3-3

Data start and end codes ............................... ............. 2-5

DATATRANSFERCABLES ............................ ............. Al-l

Decompilation ..................................................

l-110

DOScommand .................................................

l-109

<E>

Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-22

EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-6



Error detection and handling

..........................................

2 - 7

Error detection and messages ........................... .............. 2 - 6

ERROR MESSAGES

..............................................

A3 -

1

<F>

FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER + 3.5” floppy disk (P-G format) ...............

1 - 149

FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-UM WITH RAM .................... A2 - 1

Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC ...................... 2 - 1

<H>

Handy File + 3.5” floppy disk (MS-DOS format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-147

l/O module editing ............................ ....................

l-70

IBM PC/AT operating environment ........................... .......... l-10

Input/Output for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate) ...............

l-134

Input/Output ...................................................

1-119

INQUIRYFORM ................................................

A12- 1

Installation Procedure ............................ ..................

l-11

INSTALLATION ............................ ....................... 1-5

It is possible to choose output data (SymbolComment, Net comment) to ROM format file1 - 103

<I_>

Ladder diagram editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-26

Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-116

MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

..................................

MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMCRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

......


.............

Menu Configuration ............................ ...................

Merge ........................................................

Message editing

.................................................

Mnemonic Editing

...............................................

Mnemonic file format

.............................................

Model Setting ...................................................

MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

....................

AlO- 1

A6-1

1-142

1-17

1-113

l-68

l-150

l-153

l-21

A4-1

co>

Operating Environment

..............................................

1 - 6

OPERATION ....................................................

l-22

Operation

..............................................

1 - 95, l-110,3-4

Outputting to split files

............................................

1-112

OVERVIEW

...................................................

1 - 1,3-l



<P>

Password set function

PC9801 operating environment

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 - 7

Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-85

Programming with the Step Sequence Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1

Protocol

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-4

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

l-122

<s>

Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

...................................

Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

.................................

SETTINGAMODEL

...............................................

Setting form feed .................................................

Setting line feed

.................................................

Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

..............

Setting the cross-reference list output information

..........................

Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

.............

Setting the left margin

.............................................

Setting the line spacing

............................................

Setting the output format guidance

....................................

Setting the output format

...........................................

Setting the output information

........................................

Setting the printer model and print paper ................................

Setting the read/write coil guidance

....................................

Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

............................

Setting the title of printout

...........................................

Setting the top margin

.............................................

SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE

.......................................

Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

...............................

Specifying the cross-reference list output format

...........................

Specifying the cross-reference list page break

............................

Standard Symbol Data

.............................................

Symbol and comment editing ........................................

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE “%%% FLSET.CNF.”

.....................

System parameter editing

..........................................

1-166

l-157

3-4

2-23

2-23

2-19

2-20

2-21

2-16

2-16

2-22

2-22

2-22

2-15

2-23

2- 14

2- 19

2-14

A9-1

2-21

2-20

2-21

2-11

l-60

All-l

l-73

<T>

The Configration of a Sequence Program

.................................

3 - 2

The list of source program

.........................................

l-105

The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model

........

l-170

Title data editing

.................................................

l-25

TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

......................

A8 - 1

Transfer to and from PMC-UM (FANUC Series 0)

.........................

l-124

Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15-MODEL A, -MODEL B)

...... l-131





Revision Record

FAPT LADDER (For Personal Computer) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-66131 E

5 Dec., 95

- Corresponding descriptions for PMC-RBSIRBGiNB2

04

*

Addition of PMC-MODEL RA3/RB3/FKX/PAl/PA3/QC/NB

.

Addition of symbol and comment edit function on Ladder Edit

screen

Jun., ‘93

*

Addition of external ROM format file conversion function

*

Addition of cross reference print format setting function

.

Addition of mnemonic edit label/subprogram Item

.

Change of symbol and comment edit function

03

Dec., ‘92

Correction of errors

02 Sep., ‘92

Total revision

01 Jun., ‘90

Edition Date

Contents

Edition

Date Contents



Date post:	27-Feb-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	sebautomatisme
View:	1,090 times
Download:	228 times

FAPT Ladder for PC-Operator Manual

Documents